advertisement
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Product Reference Guide
Datalogic ADC, Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, OR 97402
USA
Telephone: (541) 683-5700
Fax: (541) 345-7140
© 2006-2013 Datalogic, Inc.
An Unpublished Work - All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this documentation or the procedures described therein may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission of Datalogic
ADC, Inc. or its subsidiaries or affiliates ("Datalogic" or “Datalogic ADC”). Owners of Datalogic products are hereby granted a non-exclusive, revocable license to reproduce and transmit this documentation for the purchaser's own internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not remove or alter any proprietary notices, including copyright notices, contained in this documentation and shall ensure that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation.
Should future revisions of this manual be published, you can acquire printed versions by contacting your Datalogic representative. Electronic versions may either be downloadable from the Datalogic website (www.datalogic.com) or provided on appropriate media. If you visit our website and would like to make comments or suggestions about this or other Datalogic publications, please let us know via the "Contact Datalogic" page.
Disclaimer
Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accurate, however,
Datalogic reserves the right to change any specification at any time without prior notice.
Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including the U.S.A. and the E.U. All other brand and product names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Magellan is a registered trademark of Datalogic ADC, Inc. in many countries, including the U.S.A. and the E.U.
4603262 • 4639606 • 4652750 • 4672215 • 4699447 • 4709369 • 4749879 • 4786798 • 4792666 • 4794240 • 4798943 • 4799164 •
4820911 • 4845349 • 4861972 • 4861973 • 4866257 • 4868836 • 4879456 • 4939355 • 4939356 • 4943127 • 4963719 • 4971176 •
4971177 • 4991692 • 5001406 • 5015831 • 5019697 • 5019698 • 5086879 • 5115120 • 5144118 • 5146463 • 5179270 • 5198649 •
5200597 • 5202784 • 5208449 • 5210397 • 5212371 • 5212372 • 5214270 • 5229590 • 5231293 • 5232185 • 5233169 • 5235168 •
5237161 • 5237162 • 5239165 • 5247161 • 5256864 • 5258604 • 5258699 • 5260554 • 5274219 • 5296689 • 5298728 • 5311000 •
5327451 • 5329103 • 5330370 • 5347113 • 5347121 • 5371361 • 5382783 • 5386105 • 5389917 • 5410108 • 5420410 • 5422472 •
5426507 • 5438187 • 5440110 • 5440111 • 5446271 • 5446749 • 5448050 • 5463211 • 5475206 • 5475207 • 5479011 • 5481098 •
5491328 • 5493108 • 5504350 • 5508505 • 5512740 • 5541397 • 5552593 • 5557095 • 5563402 • 5565668 • 5576531 • 5581707 •
5594231 • 5594441 • 5598070 • 5602376 • 5608201 • 5608399 • 5612529 • 5629510 • 5635699 • 5641958 • 5646391 • 5661435 •
5664231 • 5666045 • 5671374 • 5675138 • 5682028 • 5686716 • 5696370 • 5703347 • 5705802 • 5714750 • 5717194 • 5723852 •
5750976 • 5767502 • 5770847 • 5786581 • 5786585 • 5787103 • 5789732 • 5796222 • 5804809 • 5814803 • 5814804 • 5821721 •
5822343 • 5825009 • 5834708 • 5834750 • 5837983 • 5837988 • 5852286 • 5864129 • 5869827 • 5874722 • 5883370 • 5905249 •
5907147 • 5923023 • 5925868 • 5929421 • 5945670 • 5959284 • 5962838 • 5979769 • 6000619 • 6006991 • 6012639 • 6016135 •
6024284 • 6041374 • 6042012 • 6045044 • 6047889 • 6047894 • 6056198 • 6065676 • 6069696 • 6073849 • 6073851 • 6094288 •
6112993 • 6129279 • 6129282 • 6134039 • 6142376 • 6152368 • 6152372 • 6155488 • 6166375 • 6169614 • 6173894 • 6176429 •
6188500 • 6189784 • 6213397 • 6223986 • 6230975 • 6230976 • 6244510 • 6259545 • 6260763 • 6266175 • 6273336 • 6276605 •
6279829 • 6290134 • 6290135 • 6293467 • 6303927 • 6311895 • 6318634 • 6328216 • 6332576 • 6332577 • 6343741 • 6454168 •
6478224 • 6568598 • 6578765 • 6705527 • 6857567 • 6974084 • 6991169 • 7051940 • 7170414 • 7172123 • 7201322 • 7204422 •
7215493 • 7224540 • 7234641 • 7243850 • 7374092 • 7407096 • 7490770 • 7495564 • 7506816 • 7527198 • 7527207 • 7537166 •
7562817 • 601 26 118.6 • AU703547 • D312631 • D313590 • D320011 • D320012 • D323492 • D330707 • D330708 • D349109 • D350127
• D350735 • D351149 • D351150 • D352936 • D352937 • D352938 • D352939 • D358588 • D361565 • D372234 • D374630 • D374869 •
D375493 • D376357 • D377345 • D377346 • D377347 • D377348 • D388075 • D446524 • D606544 •EP0256296 • EP0260155 •
EP0260156 • EP0295936 • EP0325469 • EP0349770 • EP0368254 • EP0442215 • EP0498366 • EP0531645 • EP0663643 • EP0698251 •
EP01330772 • EP870761 • GB2252333 • GB2284086 • GB2301691 • GB2304954 • GB2307093 • GB2308267 • GB2308678 • GB2319103 •
GB2333163 • GB2343079 • GB2344486 • GB2345568 • GB2354340 • ISR107546 • ISR118507 • ISR118508 • JP1962823 • JP1971216 •
JP2513442 • JP2732459 • JP2829331 • JP2953593 • JP2964278 • MEX185552 • MEX187245 • RE37166 • RE40071
Table of Contents
i
Product Reference Guide
ii
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Product Reference Guide iii
iv
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Product Reference Guide v
vi
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Product Reference Guide vii
viii
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
®
systems ONLY) ........................................................................................ B-9
Product Reference Guide ix
NOTES x
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
DATALOGIC ADC, INC. MAGELLAN
TM
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
Notice to End User: The Datalogic Product you have acquired contains embedded Software, which is integral to the product's operation. This Software is being provided to you under license, subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If you use the Datalogic Product, you will be deemed to have accepted the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If you do not intend to be bound to the terms of this Agreement, Datalogic is not willing to license the Software to you, you may not use the Datalogic Product or the Software, and you must contact the party from whom you acquired the Datalogic Product for instructions.
This End User Software License Agreement ("Agreement") is a legally binding agreement governing the licensing of the Software and Documentation by Datalogic
Holdings, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates ("Datalogic") to the entity or person who has purchased or otherwise acquired a Datalogic Product ("End User").
For purposes of this Agreement, any software that is associated with a separate end-user license agreement is licensed to you under the terms of that license agreement. Datalogic and End User hereby agree as follows:
1. Definitions.
1.1 "Documentation" means materials such as user's guides, program reference guides, quick reference guides, manuals, or similar materials associated with or related to the Datalogic Product, whether in printed, "online", or other form.
1.2 "Proprietary Information" means: (a) source code, object code, software, documentation, and any related internal design, system design, data base design, algorithms, technology, technical data or information, implementation techniques, and trade secrets related to the Software, (b) any other trade secrets marked appropriately or identified as proprietary or confidential, and (c) any information that End User, under the circumstances, should recognize as confidential. Proprietary Information does not include any information that the receiving party can establish was (1) in the public domain, (2) already in the receiving party's possession or rightfully known prior to receipt, (3) rightfully learned from a third party not in violation of any other's proprietary rights, or
(4) independently developed without access to Proprietary Information.
1.3 "Datalogic Product" means the Datalogic Magellan
TM
800i, Magellan
TM
1000i series, Magellan
TM
1100i series, Magellan
TM
1400i series, Magellan
TM
2200VS series, Magellan
TM
2300HS series, Magellan
TM
3200VSi series, Magellan
TM
3300HSi series, Magellan
TM
8100 series, Magellan
TM
8200 series, Magellan
TM
8300 series, Magellan
TM
8400 series, Magellan
TM
8500 series, Magellan
TM
9500 series, Magellan
TM
9800i series and/or Magellan SL
TM
series scanner and/ or scanner/scale product, including all embedded Software in and all Documentation related to such product, which has been purchased or otherwise acquired by End User, whether obtained directly or indirectly from Datalogic.
1.4 "Software" means any software or computer programs of Datalogic or its third party licensors in machine readable form which is embedded in the Datalogic Product, whether obtained directly or indirectly from Datalogic, including any replacement, update, upgrade, enhancement or modification.
2. Scope Of License Granted.
2.1 Datalogic grants to End User a non-exclusive, non-transferable, perpetual license to use the Software, solely on the Datalogic Product in which it is embedded ("designated Datalogic Product"), in machine-readable form only, solely for End User's internal business purposes. This Agreement does not convey ownership of the Software to End User. Title to the Software shall be and remain with Datalogic or the third party from whom Datalogic has obtained a licensed right. As used in this Agreement, the term "purchase" or its equivalents when applied to the Software shall mean "acquire under license." End User is not entitled to receipt or use of the source code to any Software.
2.2 End User shall not copy, modify, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, or otherwise reproduce or remanufacture the Software, whether modified or unmodified, nor sell, assign, sublicense, distribute, lend, rent, give, or otherwise transfer the Software to any other person or organization, for purposes other than as expressly provided in this Agreement, without Datalogic's prior written consent.
3. Transfers, Support.
3.1 Any copying, installing, reproduction, remanufacture, reverse engineering, electronic transfer, or other use of the Software on other than the designated
Datalogic Product will be a material breach of this Agreement. However, Datalogic may elect not to terminate this Agreement or the granted licenses, but instead may elect to notify End User that End User is deemed to have ordered and accepted a license for each breaching use. End User shall pay Datalogic the applicable list price for such licenses as of the date of such breach.
3.2 End User shall not sell, assign, sublicense, distribute, lend, rent, give, or otherwise transfer the Datalogic Product to any third party unless such third party agrees with Datalogic in writing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such transfer of the Datalogic Product absent such agreement shall be null and void.
3.3 End User may obtain support for Software from Datalogic at Datalogic's standard support fees and under Datalogic's standard support terms and conditions in effect at the time the support is requested.
4. Intellectual Property.
End User acknowledges that the Software constitutes valuable trade secrets of Datalogic or Datalogic's third party licensors and that the Software is protected by intellectual property laws and treaties. The license set forth in this Agreement does not transfer to End User any ownership of Datalogic's or its third party licensors' copyrights, patents, trademarks, service marks, trade secrets, or other intellectual property rights and End User shall have no right to commence any legal actions to obtain such rights. End User shall not remove, modify, or take any other action that would obscure any copyright, trademark, patent marking, or other intellectual property notices contained in or on the Datalogic Product.
5. Proprietary Information.
5.1 End User acknowledges that Proprietary Information is the confidential, proprietary, and trade secret property of Datalogic and Datalogic's third party licensors and End User acquires no right or interest in any Proprietary Information.
5.2 End User shall not disclose, provide, or otherwise make available the Proprietary Information of Datalogic or its third party licensors to any person other than End User's authorized employees or agents who are under confidentiality agreement, and End User shall not use the Proprietary Information other than in conjunction with use of the Datalogic Product exclusively for End User's internal business purposes. End User shall take steps to protect the Proprietary Information no less securely than if it were End User's own intellectual property.
5.3 The provisions of this Proprietary Information Section shall survive and continue for five (5) years after the termination of this Agreement.
6. Limited Warranty.
6.1 Datalogic warrants that, under normal use and operation, the Datalogic Product will conform substantially to the applicable Documentation for the period specified in the Documentation. During this period, for all reproducible nonconformities for which Datalogic has been given written notice, Datalogic will use commercially reasonable efforts to remedy nonconformities verified by Datalogic. End User agrees to supply Datalogic with all reasonably requested information and assistance necessary to help Datalogic in remedying such nonconformities. For all defects reported to Datalogic within the warranty period, Datalogic's liability is limited to providing End User with one copy of corrections or responding to End User's problem reports according to Datalogic's standard assistance practices. Datalogic does not warrant that the product will meet End User's requirements or that use of the product will be uninterrupted or error free, or that Datalogic's remedial efforts will correct any nonconformance. This limited warranty does not cover any product that has been subjected to damage or abuse, whether intentionally, accidentally, or by neglect, or to unauthorized repair or unauthorized installation, and shall be void if End User modifies the product, uses the product in any manner other than as established in the Documentation, or if End User breaches any of
Product Reference Guide xi
the provisions of this Agreement.
6.2 EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT, THE DATALOGIC PRODUCT IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND DATALOGIC MAKES NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-
ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
7. Infringement.
7.1 Datalogic will defend End User against any claim in a lawsuit that the Datalogic Product furnished hereunder infringe a United States patent or copyright of a third party and Datalogic will pay any damages finally awarded against End User by a court of competent jurisdiction that are attributable to such claim or will pay End User's part of any settlement that is attributable to such claim, provided, that 1) End User notifies Datalogic promptly in writing of the claim, 2) Datalogic controls the defense or settlement of the claim, and 3) End User cooperates fully with Datalogic in such defense or settlement. All notices of a claim should be sent to Datalogic Holdings, Inc., Legal Department, 959 Terry Street, Eugene, OR 97402.
7.2 In the defense or settlement of any such claim, Datalogic may, at its option, 1) procure for End User the right to continue using the Datalogic Product, 2) modify the Datalogic Product so that it becomes non-infringing, 3) replace the Datalogic Product with an equivalent product not subject to such claim, or 4) provide End User an opportunity to return the Datalogic Product and receive a refund of the purchase price paid, less a reasonable allowance for use.
7.3 Datalogic shall have no liability to End User for claims of infringement based upon 1) the use of any Datalogic Product in combination with any product which Datalogic has not either furnished or authorized for use with such Datalogic Product 2) the use of any Datalogic Product designed, manufactured, or modified to the specifications of End User, or 3) End User's modification of the Datalogic Product without written authorization from Datalogic.
7.4 THE FOREGOING STATES DATALOGIC'S COMPLETE AND ENTIRE OBLIGATION CONCERNING CLAIMS OF PATENT, COPYRIGHT, OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL
PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT, CANCELS AND SUPERSEDES ANY PRIOR AGREEMENTS, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, BETWEEN THE PARTIES CONCERNING
SUCH CLAIMS, AND WILL NOT BE MODIFIED OR AMENDED BY ANY PAST, CONTEMPORANEOUS, OR FUTURE AGREEMENTS OR DEALINGS BETWEEN THE
PARTIES, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN A FUTURE WRITING SIGNED BY BOTH PARTIES.
8. Limitation Of Liability.
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN SECTION 7, DATALOGIC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIMS AGAINST END USER BY ANY OTHER PARTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL DATA-
LOGIC'S LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, IF ANY, WHETHER BASED UPON CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY, STRICT LIABILITY, WAR-
RANTY, OR ANY OTHER BASIS, EXCEED THE PRICE OR FEE PAID BY END USER FOR THE DATALOGIC PRODUCT. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL DATALOGIC BE
LIABLE TO END USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR SERVICE, OR FOR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, CONSE-
QUENTIAL, CONTINGENT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY, OR OTHER SIMILAR DAMAGES, EVEN IF DATALOGIC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSI-
BILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
9. Government Restricted Rights; International Use.
9.1 Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software by the U.S. Government is subject to the restrictions for computer software developed at private expense as set forth in the U.S. Federal Acquisition Regulations at FAR 52.227-14(g), or 52.227-19 or in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at
DFARS 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii), whichever is applicable.
9.2 If End User is using the Datalogic Product outside of the United States, End User must comply with the applicable local laws of the country in which the
Datalogic Product is used, with U.S. export control laws, and with the English language version of this Agreement. The provisions of the "United Nations
Convention on International Sale of Goods" shall not apply to this Agreement.
10. Termination.
10.1 Either party may terminate this Agreement or any license granted under this Agreement at any time upon written notice if the other party breaches any provision of this Agreement.
10.2 Upon termination of this Agreement, End User immediately shall cease using any non-embedded software and shall return to Datalogic or destroy all non-embedded software covered by this Agreement, and shall furnish Datalogic with a certificate of compliance with this provision signed by an officer or authorized representative of End User. For embedded software, End User agrees to sign a waiver prepared by Datalogic concerning further use of the embedded Software. End User's resumed or continued use of the embedded Software after termination shall constitute End User's agreement to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement for such use.
11. General Provisions.
sedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements, written or oral, between the parties concerning the licensing of the Software. This Agreement may not be changed, amended, or modified except by written document signed by Datalogic.
11.2 Notice. All notices required or authorized under this Agreement shall be given in writing, and shall be effective when received, with evidence of receipt.
Notices to Datalogic shall be sent to the attention of Contract Administration, Datalogic Holdings, Inc., 959 Terry Street, Eugene, OR 97402, or such other address as may be specified by Datalogic in writing.
11.3 Waiver. A party's failure to enforce any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement shall not prevent the party's later enforcement of such terms and conditions.
11.4
Governing Law; Venue: This Agreement and the rights of the parties hereunder shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the
State of Oregon U.S.A, without regard to the rules governing conflicts of law. The state or federal courts of the State of Oregon located in either Multnomah or Lane counties shall have exclusive jurisdiction over all matters regarding this Agreement, except that Datalogic shall have the right, at its absolute discretion, to initiate proceedings in the courts of any other state, country, or territory in which End User resides, or in which any of End User's assets are located.
able attorneys' fees, both at trial and on appeal.
- END - xii
Magellan TM 8300/8400
Chapter 1
Introduction
This Product Reference Guide contains comprehensive instructions on scanner or scanner/scale installation. Either model may be termed “scanner” for the purpose of simplicity in this manual. Also included are feature configuration using special programming feature bar code labels and advanced user information as described in the following chapter descriptions.
Manual Overview
, outlines the manual’s contents, details features
and specifications, provides regulatory and safety information, and lists the symbologies (bar code types) the scanner will read.
Chapter 2, Site Preparation and Installation
, presents physical dimensions for the scanner or scanner/scale and popular accessories, and provides counter preparation and installation procedures. Cable routing, connection and testing are additionally detailed in this chapter.
Chapter 3, Operation and Maintenance
, contains use and maintenance instructions; providing details about operator controls, programming and diagnostic modes, scale “zeroing” and calibration. Scanner and scale routine maintenance is also outlined in this chapter.
, outlines the three scanner/scale test modes:
Selftest, Operational Tests and Diagnostic Tests. Procedures for system problem and troubleshooting flowcharts to aid in problem resolution are also presented in this chapter.
, explains scale calibration and verification procedures, including procedures for calibrating the scale in pounds as well as kilograms.
1-1
Product Reference Guide
, highlights the function(s) of each programmable feature and provides a dedicated set of bar codes for configuring scanner and scanner/scale features. This chapter is organized by the categories:
General Features, Interface Related Features and Symbology Related Features.
Appendix A, LED/Beeper Indications & Controls
, contains tables describing the various functions and indications of the scanner/scale control panel features.
, references wire requirements, connector
specifications and pinout details for product cabling.
, is a set of bar codes representing the digits and
characters required to enter extended programming data needed during certain programming sessions.
, furnishes a partial listing of available host commands that can be used with a compatible host interface.
Appendix E, Keyboard Function Key Mappings
, summarizes the keyboard models, their defined protocol, scancode set, and some unique features. Other tables in this chapter provide the function key maps associated with each of the scancode sets.
, lists factory default programmable settings for common interfaces.
Appendix G, Handheld Data Format Requirements
, contains application notes describing the general format of data accepted by the scanner through the auxilliary port as transmitted from a handheld scanner.
How to Use This Manual
Reference the first chapter of this manual for a general description of the product’s features and an outline of the manual’s contents and organization. View the remaining chapters for procedures regarding scanner or scanner/scale installation, operation, maintenance, calibration and bar code programming.
1-2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Manual Overview
Manual Conventions
‘NOTE’ blocks contain information that is helpful and recommended. They provide information that is critical to operations and/or procedures described in this manual.
LEGAL NOTE
‘LEGAL NOTE’ blocks indicate procedures or activities which may be regulated under law by governmental agencies. It is your responsibility to ensure compliance with the regulations that govern installation of weighing devices.
‘CAUTION’ blocks inform you that proper handling (adherence to the procedures described) is required to avoid damage to equipment and/ or property.
‘WARNING’ blocks alert you to potential physical harm or injury. These statements do not include potentially fatal hazards, which would be designated as ‘DANGER’ blocks. Use of this product does not warrant the need for a
DANGER block.
Product Reference Guide
1-3
Technical Support
Datalogic Website Support
The Datalogic website ( www.datalogic.com
) is the complete source for technical support and information for Datalogic products. The site offers product support, product registration, warranty information, product manuals, product tech notes, software updates, demos, and instructions for returning products for repair.
Reseller Technical Support
An excellent source for technical assistance and information is an authorized Datalogic reseller. A reseller is acquainted with specific types of businesses, application software, and computer systems and can provide individualized assistance.
Telephone Technical Support
If you do not have internet or email access, you may contact Datalogic technical support at (541) 349-8281.
1-4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Scanner and Scanner/Scale Nomenclature
Scanner and Scanner/Scale Nomenclature
Controls, indicators and other nomenclature are shown in
.
Figure 1-1. Scanner/Scale Nomenclature
Scanner LED
Bonnet
Weighing Surface — Lean
Oversize Produce Here
All Weighs™ Platter
Vertical Window
Horizontal
Window
Volume/Tone
Push Button
Scale Zero
Push Button
Speaker (Beeper) Port
Produce Bar in raised position
Product Reference Guide
1-5
Connections
Two connector panels are located on either side of the scanner as shown in
. The appearance of these panels will vary depending upon the
factory options purchased with your model. Additionally, a service “pigtail” extends from the scanner’s base to connect the control panel cable from the Bonnet area.
Figure 1-2. Connectors
Control Panel
Service Loop
Scanner Right Profile Scanner Left Profile
1-6
EAS Port Aux. Port Power
EAS PORT AUXILIARY PORT POWER
Connection to external EAS device.
Controls EAS deactivation system.
· Test Port
· On Screen
Programming (OSP)
· Application Download
· RS-232 Handheld
Scanner Input
· Auxiliary RS-232
Label Data Output
AC Brick Input
OR
Power off Terminal
(POT) Brick Input
POS Terminal
0.00
Remote Display Scale Host
POS TERMINAL REMOTE DISPLAY SCALE HOST
· Label Data
· Scale Data (for
single cable interfaces)
· Application Download
(where appropriate)
Drives Remote Display Scale Data (dual cable scanner/scale)
Connection to this port is
Optional
Models with scale only
Dual cable units only.
(Scale connection may be handled through
POS Terminal port)
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Physical Parameters
Physical Parameters
This chapter provides specifications for performance, environmental and
electrical parameters. Reference
Chapter 2, Site Preparation and Installation
, for physical measurements of all models and some accessories.
Scanning
The scanner has a scan zone between the two windows where the scanner projects laser light in order to scan items. Two separate projections, one from the horizontal window and one from the vertical window, combine to form a zone where bar code labels are read. Refer to
, for more information.
Deactivating EAS Labels
Deactivation of EAS (Electronic Article Surveillance) anti-theft labels is an additional function that can be performed by the scanner. More information about this feature can be referenced under the following topics:
•
Chapter 3, Deactivating Security Labels
•
Product Reference Guide
1-7
Weighing
Specifications for scale capacity, settling time, minimum and maximum static weight, zeroing, and warm-up time are given below. For more infor-
, refer to
Chapter 3, Operation and Maintenance
in this manual.
Rated Weight Capacity
The scale’s operational weight capacity is:
• 30.00 pounds, displayed in 0.01 increments
OR
• 15.000 kilograms, displayed in 0.005 increments.
Minimum Increment
The minimum weight that can be accurately measured by the scale is 0.01 lb. (0.005 kg).
Maximum Static Weight (Overload)
A maximum static weight of 150 pounds (68 kg) can be sustained by the scale without incurring damage or degrading performance.
Automatic Zero Maintenance
The scale’s software constantly monitors and adjusts the Zero point as long as the deviation is within acceptable limits, while compensating for any debris accumulation or removal. During power-up, the scale automatically re-zeros after verifying that all subsystems are functional. Additionally, the scale may be manually “zeroed” by pushing the Scale Zero Push
Button located at the bottom of the control panel.
1-8
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Physical Parameters
Warm-Up Time
There are two pertinent warm-up times that apply to the scanner or scanner/scale:
NOTE
The two warm-up periods can be performed concurrently, thereby reducing the total required warm-up time to 60 minutes.
Thermal Equilibrium
When the unit is moved from a cooler temperature (such as a storage area) to a warmer environment (such as a checkstand location), 60 minutes must be allowed to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions prior to calibration or operation.
Power-up
Once installed and powered up, a warm-up time of 15 minutes must be allowed before calibrating or performing weighing operations.
User Configurable Warm-up
The user may configure the unit for a pre-programmed warm-up time that is activated every time the scanner is powered up. During this time, the scale is viewed by the POS terminal as off-line.
NOTE
Contact
advanced programmable feature.
Product Reference Guide
1-9
Figure 1-3. Environmental Specifications
Operation
+40 C +104 F
10 C 50 F
Temperature
10° to +40° C
50° to +104° F
Dust Proof Optics Cavity, IP5X
Illumination
Artificial Light:
0-450 Foot-candles
(4,842 LUX)
Sunlight:
0-8,000 Foot-candles
(86,080 LUX)
Humidity
Hot / Wet 40°C / 95% RH
Spill Proof
(Datalogic MS-0006-13-0004)
Hot / Dry 40°C / 15% RH
Cold / Dry 10°C / 1 5% RH
Warm / Wet 25%C / 50% RH
Storage
+70 C +158 F
-40 C -40 F
POS Scanner
Temperature
-40° to +70° C
-40° to +158° F
Electrical Specifications
Before installation, always verify that the site’s electrical service meets the scanner/scale’s requirements. The scanner has been engineered for compatibility with most international electrical systems operating in ranges from 100 to 240VAC at 50-60 Hz. Verify that the power source will supply “clean” electrical power to the equipment; that is, it must be free of excess electrical noise.
1-10
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Electrical Specifications
Power Supply
Power Off the Terminal (P.O.T)
Certain units can receive power directly from the terminal (P.O.T.). A
USB adapter “brick” connects the scanner to IBM-USB 12V ports.
Power supplied from the terminal does not include auxiliary power for alternative scales.
NOTE
AC Adapter
Units which do not receive power directly from the terminal will use either a Listed Class 2 or Listed LPS power source which supplies power directly to the unit. When using such an AC Adapter, make sure to connect using the correct IEC power cord for unique and international power connections. If the cord will not plug into your AC power receptacle, the power cord shipped is not compatible with your electrical system. Please contact your distributor immediately to receive the necessary information and components to ensure electrical compatibility.
VOLTAGE
100-240VAC ±10%
FREQUENCY
50-60
Hz
CAUTION
Safe operation of your scanner or scanner/scale requires properly grounded electrical outlets. Be sure to have a qualified electrician certify the earth-ground connection on circuits which will be used to power the unit.
NOTE
The scanner is powered on/off by connecting/disconnecting it from its power supply.
Product Reference Guide
1-11
Laser and Product Safety
Laser safety requirements are based on IEC Standard Publication 60825-1
(2007) and CDRH 21CFR, Chapter 1, Subchapter J and (CDRH) Laser
Product Performance Standard, User information [1040.10(h)1]:
• User Maintenance. No user maintenance of the laser system other than cleaning of the scan windows is required.
• Radiant Energy. The scanner is an IEC Class 1 and CDRH IIa laser product. The system uses two embedded Class 3A Visible Laser
Diodes (VLDs) operating at 650.0 nm, in an opto-mechanical scanner, resulting in less than 3.1μW radiated power as observed through a 7mm aperture averaged over 10 seconds. Maximum emitted output power at the lower (sealed) window is 880μW, pulse duration is 89 μS. No attempt should be made by the user to remove the protective housing of the scanner/scale.
• Laser Light Viewing. The horizontal and vertical scan windows are the only apertures through which laser light may be observed in this product.
Exposure to the light emitted from the scan windows has been shown not to be harmful. The safety record of bar code scanning is perfect after millions of hours of use worldwide. This safe and efficient use of laser technology has gained wide acceptance in industries throughout the world.
Operators and installers of the unit should observe the following cautions and warnings:
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser light exposure.
The use of optical instruments with the scanner will increase eye hazard. (Optical instruments include binoculars, microscopes, telescopes and magnifying glasses. This does not include eyeglasses worn by the user).
To prevent exposure to laser light, do not remove the protective housing of the scanner. There are no user-serviceable parts inside your scanner or scanner/scale.
1-12
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Laser and Product Safety
Safety precautions to be taken:
CAUTION
No adjustments or alteration of the scanner or scanner/scale housing are to be attempted by the user.
The failure of the facet wheel motor while the unit is continuing to emit a laser beam causes the emission levels to exceed those for inherently safe operation. The unit has safeguards to prevent this occurrence. If, however, a stationary laser beam is ever emitted, the failing unit should be disconnected from its power supply until repaired by a qualified technician.
WARNING
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help.
Canadian Notice
This equipment does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions as described in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian
Department of Communications.
Product Reference Guide
1-13
Le present appareil numerique n’emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe B prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada.
Labeling
Regulatory, reference and safety labeling is shown in
.
Figure 1-4. Labeling
IEC Laser
Warning
Model/Serial
Number
Scale
Regulatory
Product
Family
Label
I/F Connector
ID and
Regulatory
1-14
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Agency Compliances
Agency Compliances
The scanner and scanner/scale meets or exceeds the requirements for its device type as set forth by the following agencies and regulations:
COMMENTS COUNTRY
United States
State of California
Canada
Europe
Mexico
Korea
Argentina
Taiwan
China
Japan
Australia/New Zealand
United States
Canada
Europe
Australia/New Zealand
Japan
Taiwan
COMPLIANCE
Electrical
UL 60950
Energy Efficiency Standard
CAN/CSA 60950
TÜV EN 60950
NOM
K-Mark
IRAM
BSMI
CCC
PSE
AS/NZ 60950
Emisions
47CFR Part 15J
ICES-0003
EN 55022
AS/NZS CISPR22
VCCI
CNS 13438 BSMI
FCC Class B
Class B
Class B
Class B
Product Reference Guide
1-15
Korea
ROW
COUNTRY
United States
Europe
United States
Canada
Argentina
Australia/New Zealand
Brazil
EC Countries
Mexico
Puerto Rico
Singapore
ROW
Russia
COMPLIANCE
Mic Mark
CISPR 22
Laser Safety
CDRH, 21CFR Part 1040
IEC 60825-1:2007
EN 60825-1:2007
Weights & Measures
NIST Handbook 44
Measurement Canada
Class B
COMMENTS
CDRH Class IIa laser device
Class 1
Class 1
(Dept. of Commerce)
National Measurement Institute
INMETRO
Type Approval Cert
NOM
Same as USA
Spring Singapore
OIML R76
Contact Datalogic
®
Product Marketing at (541) 683-5700, or your Datalogic representative for a complete listing of approvals for other countries.
1-16
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Bar Codes Supported
Bar Codes Supported
The scanner can read/decode the following bar code types (symbologies):
Retail Codes
• UPC Versions A & E with full expansion E to A, plus A and E to 13 capability
• UPC Supplementals and Add-ons (Bookland & Coupon code,
UPC two character supplemental encodation and UPC five character supplemental encodation and supplemental C128) with support for conditional add-ons
• DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly RSS-14)
• DataBar Expanded (formerly RSS Expanded) maximum characters
74 numeric or 41 alpha
• DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional (formerly RSS-14 Stacked)
• EAN 8 & 13 with full expansion 8 to 13
• JAN 8 & 13 with full expansion 8 to 13
• UCC/EAN 128
• Italian Pharmacode (Code 39)
• Support GTIN
Industrial Codes
• Code 39
• Code 39 full ASCII
• Code 128 (including conversion to Code 39)
• Code 93
• Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
• Standard 2 of 5
• Codabar
• MSI/Plessey
Product Reference Guide
1-17
Dual Bar Codes for Japan (2 label read)
NOTE
The following qualifications apply to Dual Bar Codes for Japan:
• Two label combined transmission
• Two label global midamble (see
, for more details)
• Two label flag is set by selecting any 4 digits as the flag
1-18
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Chapter 2
Site Preparation and
Installation
This chapter provides a reference for preparing most checkstands to receive the scanner or scanner/scale. Included are physical parameters and instructions for checkstand preparation, power and ventilation considerations, cable routing information and unit installation.
Site Preparation lists all procedures necessary to prepare the checkstand.
The instructions that follow, titled
, detail steps for the scanner only and scanner/scale variations that are available
(shown in
) to facilitate easy installation into almost any
checkstand application around the world.
Once the procedures in this chapter are complete, the scanner is ready for scanning operation
1
; with the exception that if a scanner/scale was installed, calibration will be required before placing the unit into operation. You must consult the local weights and measures authority to ensure that all legal requirements are met concerning calibration and certifica-
, contains detailed procedures for calibrat-
ing the scale in either pounds or kilograms.
Product Reference Guide
1. Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) operation requires the installation of an aftermarket purchased EAS system..
2-1
Models
Scanner and scanner/scale models (reference
different lengths, allowing them to fit with little or no modification into openings cut for previously installed scanners such as Datalogic lan
®
scanners, or NCR
®
®
Magel-
scanner models 7820/24 and 7870. Other models are designed for applications with smaller footprint requirements.
provides simplified illustrations of short, medium and long models. The appearance of your unit may vary. Scanner/scale models also offer an option for a raised Produce Rail, or a flip-up Produce Bar as
Figure 2-1. Model Examples
Scanner ONLY models Scanner/Scale models
Model 8301/8401
Short
Model 8302/8402
Medium
Model 8304/8404
Medium
Model 8303/8403 Model 8305/8405
Long
Figure 2-2. Flanged and Shelf Model Examples
Flange Model Shelf Model
Long
Flanges
2-2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Pre-Installation Considerations
Figure 2-3. Produce Bar and Produce Rail
Produce
Bar Option
Produce
Rail Option
Pre-Installation Considerations
It should be noted that the scope of this manual does not encompass all factors related to worker safety and checkstand design. It does, however, offer a list of considerations that may be helpful in ensuring greater safety and productivity. Careful planning using these general guidelines should result in a more efficient, comfortable work environment.
The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics reports that the incidence of repetitive motion injuries has increased dramatically in recent years. Checkstand design and scanner installation and operation procedures can reduce the risk of repetitive motion injuries, but not eliminate it.
Although there are currently no formal guidelines for checkstand ergonomics, the Food Marketing Institute (FMI) and the National Institute of
Occupational Safety (NIOSH) of the Department of Health and Human
Services have released the reports listed at the end of these recommendations. These reports contain useful suggestions for ergonomic improvement of checkstand designs and scanner installation, maintenance and usage. Portions of the reports are summarized below. For copies of the complete reports, or to inquire about any modifications to the recommendations, contact FMI and NIOSH at the addresses listed at the end of these recommendations.
Product Reference Guide
2-3
Checkstand Design
1. Select a design which allows load-sharing by several muscle groups
(for example designs which allow the cashier to use both hands for scanning and bagging).
2. Select checkstands which deliver products to the cashier on an input belt and do not require the unloading of items from a cart. These designs put less stress on the cashiers’ shoulders and back.
3. Minimize the distance between the input and take-away conveyors
(i.e., the distance the cashier has to reach to move the products).
4. Minimize the width of the input conveyor to reduce the cashier’s reach to items on the far side of the belt; use a diverter to direct products closer to the cashier.
5. Select a design which encourages the cashier to slide products across the scanner rather than gripping and lifting. Make sure the horizontal surface of the scanner is flush with all surrounding surfaces.
6. Choose a design which integrates the scanner and scale to eliminate extended reaches and lifts during weighing tasks.
7. Provide an easily accessible bag stand at a height 13 - 17 inches (33 -
43.2 cm) lower than the top surface of the checkstand to reduce stresses to the shoulders, elbows, and risks associated with lifting products into bags.
8. Do not position the bag stand between the cashier and the scanner, due to the increased reach involved.
9. Position the scanner’s horizontal scanning surface 34 - 36 inches
(86.4 - 91.4 cm) above the floor. Maintain a minimum of five inches (12.7 cm) clearance between elbows and work surfaces.
10. Provide adjustable keyboard mounting (height, tilt, and horizontal reach).
11. Position the printer, cash drawer, and other checkstand devices the cashier uses within easy reach (less than 18 inches/45.7 cm).
12. Provide adequate toe space, foot rests or rails, antifatigue mats, and where feasible, an adjustable seat or stand against which the cashiers can lean.
2-4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Scanner Installation
Scanner Installation
1. Mount the horizontal surface of the scanner flush with the countertop to encourage slide scanning rather than lifting.
2. Position the centerline of the scanner read area 8 - 10 inches (20.3 -
25.4 cm) from the edge of the checkstand (cashier side).
Scanner Maintenance
1. Keep scanner windows clean. This will improve productivity and reduce rescans.
2. Replace scanner glass when excessive scratches are evident.
References
Anonymous, 1992, “Ergonomic Improvement of Scanning Checkstand
Designs”,
Food Marketing Institute
800 Connecticut Ave. N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006
Grant, Katharyn A. et al., 1992, “Ergonomic Evaluation of Checkstand
Designs in the Retail Food Industry”,
National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health
4676 Columbia Parkway
Cincinnati, Ohio 45226
Scanner Usage
1. Minimize handling of heavy/bulky products. Leave these items in the cart and use an alternative entry method such as key entry of short PLUs, or handheld scanning.
2. Regularly train cashiers in proper scanning methods and ergonomics principles, such as:
Product Reference Guide
2-5
• Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning, sharing work equally between hands.
• Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items.
• Since the scanner reads labels on all four sides plus the top and bottom, there is no need to turn a bar code toward either of the scanner windows.
• Develop efficient scanning motions, not necessarily faster hand movements. Simply slide the item across the scanner’s horizontal window with as little orientation motion as necessary.
• Leave items in an upright position; do not lift and tilt.
• Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area is located.
• Do not favor either the vertical or horizontal window; slide items across the scanner in their natural orientations on the checkstand as much as possible.
Site Preparation Overview
Consider the following factors before installing the scanner or scanner/ scale and its optional Remote Scale Display.
Ventilation Requirements —
The scanner operates without the use of a ventilation fan. As long as there is adequate convective air flow and no major heat producing equipment in close proximity, the unit’s housing provides adequate heat dissipation. The air temperature in the checkstand around the scanner must not exceed 104°F (40°C).
Service Access Requirements —
Routine operations such as ‘zeroing’ and calibration do not require removal of the scanner from the checkstand or disassembly of the product. The installer should plan service access for the AC/DC Power Supply and cables.
2-6
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Site Preparation Overview
Recommended Power Installation —
Since the typical grocery environment includes conveyor belts and electric motors, care should be taken to ensure that the scanner has a supply of “clean” power (power without excessive electrical noise).
Counter Preparation —
Since the majority of grocery checkout lanes are designed as “left-hand take away,” the counter drawings in this chapter focus on this counter design. Simply reverse the layout for a “right-hand take away” requirement. The unit scans equally well in either of these two configurations.
Liquid Drainage —
Should a liquid spill occur, ensure that moisture can flow through the checkstand without pooling.
Leveling —
Plan ahead and provide screws/bolts in the checkstand mounts and a leveling guide (board) to allow leveling of the scanner or scanner/scale within the counter. Use a 0.375” thick board to replicate the mounting flange on the long scanner or scanner/scale, and adjust screws or bolts until the board is flush within the counter. Use a 4.0” wide board stood on its end to adjust leveling screws/bolts in rail support applications.
Cable Routing —
Placement of the scanner/scale should be planned to allow easy access to other components as well as optimize communication between the scanner, the POS terminal, the optional Remote Scale Display and any EAS peripheral equipment. Do not route interface cables near any electrical motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference.
Remote Scale Display Placement —
The customer, and checker in some instances, must be able to easily view and read the Remote Scale Display. Ambient light and mounting height considerations are discussed later in this chapter.
Vertical Clearance —
Provision must be made to allow adequate space above the scanner bonnet for removal and replacement of an L-shaped platter. Optimal clearance permits the platter to be grasped at its top vertical edge and lifted for removal without obstruction (such as a fixed keyboard mount or any type of enclosure). Should such an enclosure be
Product Reference Guide
2-7
unavoidable, an alternate method of platter removal using two coins may be employed, however a minimum vertical clearance of 1.5” (3.8 cm)
). Another consideration is that the scan zone must be kept free of obstructions such as enclosures, keyboard mounts, etc.
Figure 2-4. Vertical Clearance
DO NOT
Obstruct
L-Platter
Removal
DO NOT
Obstruct
Scan Zone
(Keyboard Mount)
Allow a minimum clearance of
1.5" (3.8cm)
(Enclosure)
Ventilation and Spacing
The scanner/scale’s perimeter housing has been designed to provide adequate space for convective cooling and unrestricted movement of the
shows the debris chutes and ventilation slots. The checkstand design must allow:
• The ambient air temperature inside the checkstand adjacent to the scanner must not exceed 104°F (40°C).
2-8
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
NOTE
Ventilation and Spacing
• A source of air that provides adequate cooling by convective air flow.
DO NOT place the scanner in a close-fitting, fully enclosed checkstand. Provide a MINIMUM of 16 square inches (103.2
square centimeters) of air intake from below the installation for sufficient convective cooling.
If motors, conveyor belts, or other heat producing equipment are located near the scanner, forced air ventilation may be required. In most installations, a 30 cfm (.84 cmm) axial fan should provide sufficient air movement. If a ventilation fan is installed, one with a removable filter that may be washed or replaced is recommended.
Figure 2-5. Debris Chutes & Ventilation Slots
Debris Chutes/Ventilation Slots
Spider Assembly
(Present only in scale models)
Product Reference Guide
2-9
Service Access
The scanner and scanner/scale have been engineered to allow performance of all routine service and maintenance (such as “zeroing” and calibration) without removing the scanner from the checkstand. Additionally all cable connections made at the scanner can be connected and removed while the unit is sitting on the countertop. The installer should provide service access to all remaining cable connectors as well as the AC/DC Power Supply (if installed).
Power Installation
Plug your scanner into an electrical outlet that has been wired to meet all applicable electrical codes, laws, and regulations and has a common ground with the Point-of-Sale terminal
Grounding
The AC/DC Power Supply should have an AC outlet with a clean earth ground. If you are not sure how to verify the amount of electrical noise
(interference) on the power line, ask a qualified electrician to measure the input line voltage.
2-10
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Checkstand Preparation
Checkstand Preparation
. When performing a first time installation into a new checkstand, verify before cutting that room will be allowed for cabling, the AC/DC Power Supply, and any EAS peripheral equipment
(such as controller boxes, etc.). When making the opening, take extra care to accurately cut to the correct dimensions. Mounting may require installation of support(s), countertop routing, or other such devices. Depending upon checkstand design, you may wish to install an item diverter to direct items toward the scan window. See the instructions in this manual titled
“Counter Cutout” for more details concerning the location and preparation of the opening.
Figure 2-6. Installation Overview
Connector
Bulkheads
Item Diverter
AC/DC Power
Supply (if used)
Product Reference Guide
OPTIONAL:
EAS Controller
Box
2-11
Liquid Spills and Moisture
Select a checkstand design which allows fluids to flow through, and directs liquids away from any electronic equipment or storage areas.
Counter Cutout
The most important consideration when planning the counter opening for the scanner is the operator’s comfortable reaching distance. The ideal, ergonomically sound installation allows items to be directed within easy reach, and a scanning area requiring no lifting or special orientation of items. If you haven’t already read the information at the beginning of this
Pre-Installation Considerations
, please do so before continuing these instructions.
The symmetrical design of the scanner permits the operator to easily pass items from one hand to the other while scanning (either from right-to-left or left-to-right). With the unique 360 scan zone, scanning is accomplished in one fluid motion. The operator simply slides the item from the conveyor belt or diverter area through the scanning area and passes the item to the other hand, which in turn bags it or places it on a take-away conveyor belt. Movement should flow naturally over the surface of the scanner.
Note that the following guidelines for preparing an existing checkstand to accept a scanner, or incorporating the unit into a new checkstand design will not be accurate for all installations. Although these guidelines will suffice for most standard installations, the installer may need to make adjustments for varying counter heights and thicknesses, support design, or other checkstand limitations.
shows a typical “left-hand-take-away” checkstand design.
Follow these basic steps to install the unit:
1. Select a position for the scanner that offers a smooth product flow which best accommodates the reaching distance of the average operator.
2. Cut the opening in the countertop. Reference
to find the cut-out dimensions for your model. Flange and shelf mount dimensions are provided for your convenience.
2-12
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Counter Cutout
3. Install the AC/DC Power Supply, the Remote Scale Display cable (if
Remote Display is used) and the interface cable(s) observing the following:
Interface cables (and display cable, if applicable) should be routed away from all highly inductive electrical devices, like motors and conveyor belts, and even away from the unit’s power cable if possible.
Cables should be easy to remove in the event that replacement is required. A little planning now will save a lot of frustration later.
4. Connect and verify all system operations.
The scanner should be installed so that leading and trailing edges of the L
-Platter are flush with the countertop to enhance smooth, slide-through
scanning (reference the insert in
). Keep in mind that the debris chutes on both sides of the platter provide the necessary clearance for proper scale operation if you are installing a scanner/scale (you won’t need to provide an additional gap for that).
Table 2-1. Cut-Out Dimension References
MODEL(s)
8301/8401
8302/8304
8402/8404
8302/8304
8402/8404
8303/8305
8403/8405
8303/8305
8403/8405
TYPE
Short Scanner
Medium Scanner or
Scanner/Scale
Medium Scanner or
Scanner/Scale
Long Scanner or
Scanner/Scale
Long Scanner or
Scanner/Scale
FLANGE/SHELF OPTION
Shelf
Shelf
Flange
Shelf
Flange
DIMENSIONAL REFERENCE
Product Reference Guide
2-13
Conveyor
Figure 2-7. Typical Checkstand Design & Cutout Location
Remote Display
POS Terminal
& Printer
Optional
Item Diverter
Keyboard
6.3"
(16.0cm)
Deadplate
Scanner
Cash Drawer
(Below Scanner)
Check
Writing
Stand
(Optional)
Scan & Bag
Well
(Optional)
Take-Away
Belt
Bagging
Area
Flush — Correct
Above Flush — Incorrect
2-14
Below Flush — Incorrect
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Counter Cutout
Figure 2-8. Short Shelf Model 8301/8401 Cutout Dimensions
Model 8301/8401 (Short)
Minimum Cutout
Dimensions
Max. Radius = 0.25"
(0.635cm) 4x
14.00"
(35.6cm) min.
11.625"
(29.53cm) min.
Model 8301/8401 (Short)
Supports
4.08" (10.36cm)
Liquid
Drainage
Liquid
Drainage
Support Rails
Figure 2-9. Short Shelf Model 8301/8401 Scanner Reference
Dimensions
Model 8301/8401 (Short)
Scanner Reference Dimensions
11.5"
(29.21cm ± 0.1cm)
9.27"
(23.6cm
± 0.2cm)
4.59"
(11.7cm)
4.08"
(10.36cm
± 0.15cm)
5.6"
(14.22cm)
13.85"
(35.19cm ± 0.15cm)
5.19"
(13.2cm)
Product Reference Guide
2-15
Figure 2-10. Medium Shelf Models 8302/8304/8402/8404
Cutout Dimensions
Optional Leveling Feet Models 8302/8304/8402/8404 (Medium Shelf)
Minimum Cutout
Dimensions Max. Radius = 0.25"
(0.635cm) 4x
15.825"
(40.2cm) min.
11.625"
(29.53cm) min.
1.76"
(4.47cm)
6.89"
(17.5cm)
Leveling
Feet
Models 8302/8304/8402/8404 (Medium Shelf)
Supports
4.08" (103.6mm)
10.83"
(27.5cm)
Shelf/
Support Rails
Support Rails
Liquid
Drainage
Liquid
Drainage
Figure 2-11. Medium Shelf Models 8302/8304/8402/8404
Scanner Reference Dimensions
Models 8302/8304/8402/8404 (Medium Shelf)
Scanner Reference Dimensions
11.5"
(29.21cm
± 0.1cm)
2-16
9.27"
(23.6cm
± 0.2cm)
4.08"
(10.36cm
± 0.15cm)
7.5"
(19.05cm)
15.71"
(39.9cm ± 0.15cm)
4.59"
(11.7cm)
5.19"
(13.2cm)
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Counter Cutout
Figure 2-12. Medium Flanged Models 8302/8304/8402/8404
Cutout Dimensions
Models 8302/8304/8402/8404
(Medium Flanged)
Minimum Cutout Dimensions
Max. Radius = 0.25"
(0.635cm) 4x
(Center Line)
0.75"
(1.905cm)
Rail
If leveling feet are needed, use the placement shown here, represented with plus signs (+).
0.375"
(0.952cm)
Models 8302/8304/8402/8404
(Medium Flanged)
Supports
13.0 mm
0.75"
(1.9 cm)
18.00"
(45.7cm)
16.625"
(42.23cm)
0.75"
(1.905cm)
0.375"
(0.952cm)
Rail
3.06"
(7.77cm)
11.625"
(29.53cm)
3.06"
(7.77cm)
18.00"
(45.7cm)
0.375" (0.95cm)
1.5"
(3.8 cm)
0.75"
(1.9cm)
4.0"
(10.2 cm)
Liquid
Drainage
16.625"
(42.23cm)
0.75"
(1.9cm)
Liquid
Drainage
Figure 2-13. Medium Flanged Models 8302/8304/8402/8404
Scanner Reference Dimensions
Models 8302/8304/8402/8404 (Medium Flanged)
Scanner Reference Dimensions
11.5"
(29.21cm
± 0.1cm)
Product Reference Guide
9.27"
(23.6cm
± 0.2cm)
1.0"
(2.54cm)
4.08"
(10.36cm
± 0.15cm)
7.5"
(1.905cm)
15.71"
(39.9cm ± 0.15cm)
4.59"
(11.7cm)
5.19"
(13.2cm)
0.375"
(0.95cm)
1.125"
(2.86cm)
2-17
Figure 2-14. Long Shelf Models 8303/8305/8403/8405
Cutout Dimensions
Models 8303/8305/8403/8405 (Long Shelf)
Cutout
Max. Radius = 0.25"
(0.635cm) 4x
17.87"
(45.4cm)
Optional Leveling Feet
11.625"
(29.53cm)
1.76"
(4.47cm)
6.89"
(17.5cm)
Leveling
Feet
Models 8303/8305/8403/8405 (Long Shelf)
Supports
4.08" ( 10.36
cm)
Support Rails
Liquid
Drainage
Liquid
Drainage
10.83"
(27.5cm)
Shelf/
Support Rails
Figure 2-15. Long Shelf Models 8303/8305/8403/8405
Scanner Reference Dimensions
Models 8303/8305/8403/8405 (Long Shelf)
Scanner Reference Dimensions
11.5"
(29.21cm
± 0.1cm)
2-18
9.27"
(23.6cm
± 0.2cm)
4.08"
(10.36cm
± 0.15cm)
9.5"
(24.13cm)
17.75"
(45.1cm ± 0.15cm)
4.59"
(11.7cm)
5.19"
(13.2cm)
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Counter Cutout
Figure 2-16. Long Flanged Models 8303/8305/8403/8405
Cutout Dimensions
Model 8303/8305/8403/8405 (Long Flanged)
Cutout
Max. Radius = 0.25"
(0.635cm) 4x
(Center Line)
0.75"
(1.905cm)
Rail
If leveling feet are needed, use the placement shown here, represented with plus signs (+).
0.375"
(0.952cm)
Model 8303/8305/8403/8405
Supports
0.75"
(1.9 cm)
13.0 mm
20.00"
(50.8cm)
18.625"
(47.308cm)
20.00"
(50.8cm)
0.375" (.95cm)
0.75"
(1.905cm)
0.375"
(0.952)
Rail
3.06"
(7.77cm)
11.625"
(29.53cm)
3.06"
(7.77cm)
1.5"
(3.8 cm)
0.75"
(1.9cm)
4.0"
(10.2 cm)
Liquid
Drainage
18.625"
(47.3cm)
0.75"
(1.9cm)
Liquid
Drainage
Figure 2-17. Long Flanged Models 8303/8305/8403/8405
Scanner Reference Dimensions
Model 8303/8305/8403/8405 (Long Flanged)
Scanner Reference Dimensions
11.5"
(29.21cm
± 0.1cm)
Product Reference Guide
9.27"
(23.6cm
± 0.2cm)
1.0"
(2.54cm)
4.08"
(10.36cm
± 0.15cm)
9.5"
(24.13cm)
17.75"
(45.1cm ± 0.15cm)
4.59"
(11.7cm)
5.19"
(13.2cm)
1.125"
(2.857cm)
2-19
Checkstand Mounting
NOTE
There are a number of things to take into account when installing the unit into a checkstand. Key factors are ergonomic/worker safety, loading capacity and stability. Consider the scanner or scanner/scale’s weight when calculating the robustness of construction needed to support it as well as maximum capacity of weighed and scanned items.
If you choose to rout a countertop with a thickness of 0.75” (1.9
cm) plywood, you’ll need to add a backing strip that supports the area routed out for the support flanges (see
). This support strip should minimally be made of 0.75” (1.9 cm) thick plywood and be approximately 4.0” (10.2 cm) wide and 14.0”
(35.6 cm) long. This strip should be glued as well as screwed to the underside of the countertop.
Checkstand Vibration
Proper function of the scanner/scale is dependent upon an installation which minimizes excess vibration from conveyor belts, fans, and other such equipment. See
Chapter 4, Scale Error Reporting
suspected of causing operational problems.
Installation Overview
The preceding
and counter preparations to accommodate the scanner or scanner/scale.
Having completed those steps, physical installation of the scanner or scanner/scale can begin. The following instructions apply to all models.
This chapter describes:
1. Unpacking the unit.
2. Verifying operation before connecting to a POS system.
3. Routing and connecting cables.
4. Validating that your scanner communication parameters match the
POS terminal’s system requirements.
5. Confirming connection to the (optional) EAS system.
2-20
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Installation Overview
6. Functional testing to verify operation when connected to the POS system.
The following text describes each of these steps.
Unpacking
NOTE
To unpack the unit:
• Inspect the package for signs of damage that may have occurred during shipping. If damage is found, report it to your carrier immediately.
• Lift out the accessory box containing the AC/DC Power Supply, optional Remote Scale Display and cable (if present), and the Quick
Reference Guide.
• Remove the Quick Reference Guide and familiarize yourself with the unit’s controls and features. Leave the guide at the checkstand when the installation is complete.
• Remove the protective packing and carefully lift the unit from the carton. Be sure to save the box and all packing material. In the event of failure, the unit must be returned to the factory in its original packaging
.
• Carefully lift off the L-Platter as shown in
the protective foam pieces securing the weigh mechanism. Set the platter back in place.
For added protection during shipment, the L-Platter is covered
with a tight-fitting layer of vinyl as shown in
vinyl layer MUST BE REMOVED before placing the unit into service.
Product Reference Guide
2-21
Figure 2-18. Remove Protective Vinyl
Protective vinyl
MUST be removed
from the platter before use.
•
Operational Verification
Follow these steps to ensure that your unit has arrived undamaged and is fully functional before installing it in the counter and connecting it to your POS system.
1.
EAS units ONLY
: It could be necessary that EAS connections be made previous to power-up. Reference the EAS system manufacturer’s instructions for more details.
2.
Scanner/Scale units ONLY
: If the unit is a scanner/scale, connect the
Remote Scale Display to the proper connector on the unit’s connec-
). Note that if the Remote Scale Dis-
play is not connected, a scanner power-up Selftest will sound a long, low beep, and the number “8” will appear on the 7-segment display indicating a remote display error. Power-down, connect a knowngood Remote Display to the appropriate port, and restart to correct this problem. Alternatively, you can disable the Remote Display using programming bar codes (see
, for more information).
3. Connect the power cable at the scanner, then at the AC outlet.
2-22
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
NOTE
Installation Overview
When power is applied to the unit, the normal indicator sequence is:
• The scanner indicator (top-most, green LED) will be lit (dim) steadily.
• The 7-segment display will flash the number ‘8’. indicating initialization.
• If the Selftest detects a problem, the 7-segment display will display a
, for a description of failure codes and problem isolation procedures.
Scale calibration may be necessary to obtain a zero reading on the display on rare occasions.
4. The unit should be permitted to reach thermal equilibrium before
proceeding to the next steps. (Reference the topic
in
.) When the unit is moved from a
cooler temperature (such as a storage area) to a warmer environment
(such as a checkstand location), a period of 60 minutes must be allowed to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions. Once installed and powered up, a “power-up” warm-up period of 15 minutes must be allowed before calibrating or performing weighing operations.
These two warm-up periods may run concurrently.
5. Verify that the scanner or scanner/scale passes an operational test by observing the following:
Product Reference Guide
2-23
2-24
NOTE
Scanner —
Pass UPC/EAN bar code labels in front of the scanner’s windows. Since the interface cable is not yet connected to the
POS terminal, the scanner may be limited to reading only one or two labels (see the note that follows). The scanner indicates when each label has been successfully read by flashing the green scanner light and emitting a good read tone (beep). Some host interface types may “chirp” instead of beeping
.
When not connected to the host, the scanner may be limited to reading only one or two labels. (This limitation is dependent upon the interface type.) To scan multiple labels without connecting to the host, place the unit in Scanner Diagnostic Mode by pressing the Volume/Tone Push Button for four seconds.
EAS System —
The way in which EAS labels are deactivated is dependent upon which aftermarket EAS system was purchased and installed.
See the user’s manuals and other documentation accompanying that EAS equipment.
Scale —
If the Yellow (bottom) LED/Button is not lit, press that button momentarily. If the scale is operating correctly, the yellow LED will illuminate and remain on steady, and the display will show a reading of 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric). If the display is blank or a
- 0 is displayed, it may be necessary to calibrate the scale before continuing. Refer to
calibration procedures.
Remote Scale Display —
Check to verify that 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric) is displayed, then place an item on the weighing platter.
Verify that the display shows a weight and that the yellow LED goes out. Remove the item and observe that Remote Scale Display shows 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric) and that the yellow LED is On.
6. Unplug the AC power cord from the outlet and disconnect the power cord and Remote Scale Display cable from the scanner’s connector panel.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Installation Overview
After you have verified that the scanner, EAS system and scale (if present) are completely functional, continue with the following procedures to complete the installation.
Diagnostic Modes
Two diagnostic modes are available which allow you to initiate scanner or scale diagnostic tests, as well as verify the scanner’s ability to read bar codes.
Scanner Diagnostic Mode
While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, continuous scanning of labels is allowed, permitting the user to scan an unlimited number of bar codes while troubleshooting problems. Under normal operation, the scanner stores label data, awaiting the signal which transmits it to the host. When the scanner is not connected to a host, it may read and store only up to two labels, then quit reading until power is cycled (clearing the memory).
This mode of operation removes this limitation.
To place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, press the Volume/Tone
(top) Push Button for approximately four seconds. While pressing the button, the scanner will first sound three tones, wait a few seconds, then sound six rapid tones; after which you should immediately release the button.
While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, identification numbers for interface
1 type, firmware and configuration will scroll continually across the scanner’s 7-segment FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) display. This is useful infor-
mation for field diagnostics. See
display. For example, if the dual cable RS-232 interface (type 05) were enabled, the firmware designation was R96-1234, and the configuration was R96-5593, the following would be shown (slowly, with blanking between each of the items):
IF-05 r96-1234 r96-5593.
Product Reference Guide
1. A listing of scanner interface identification numbers is available in Chapter 6,
, under the topic,
.
2-25
To exit Scanner Diagnostic Mode, cycle power to the unit or press and hold the Volume/Tone Push Button for eight seconds to reset the scanner.
Chapter 3, Scanner and Scale Reset
about unit resets.
Scale Diagnostic Mode
To enter Scale Diagnostic Mode, press the Scale Zero Push Button for approximately four seconds. Six rapid tones will be sounded, indicating the unit is leaving normal operation and entering Scale Diagnostic Mode.
The Remote Display will flash a ‘1’ across the display while the dignostic routine is being run. When diagnostics are completed successfully, the display will indicate that the unit has passed the diagnostic test by displaying
PASS
. Next, the display shows a listing of how many times the unit has been calibrated and zeroed in the form of: c
XXX
where x equals the number of times the scale has been calibrated. Next, the unit will display
Zero
XXXX
where x is the number of times the scale has been zeroed.
Finally, all segments will be displayed in the form of: visual verification of display function.
-18.8.88
to allow
If the diagnostics routine is not completed successfully, the scanner will sound a series of tones and the Remote Display will show an error code.
Turn to
, for a description of error codes.
Press the Scale Zero Push Button once more to reset the unit and exit
Chapter 3, Scanner and Scale Reset
for more information about unit resets.
Cables & Connections
Considerations when routing the power and interface cables for the scanner and scanner/scale are:
• Ensure that cables are not pinched, kinked or pierced.
• Do not route interface cables in close proximity to electrical motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference.
Do not plug the AC power cord into the outlet at this time. It is a good practice to always connect the power cable to the scanner first before plugging it into the AC receptacle. The procedures titled, Set-Up, provided later in this chapter will instruct you to connect the power cord at that
illustrates the basic cable routing scheme.
2-26
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Figure 2-19. Cable Routing
Keyboard
Remote
Display
Scanner
Installation Overview
POS Terminal, Printer &
Cash Drawer
AC Power
Switch
(recommended)
AC Power
To EAS System
AC/DC
Power
Supply
Remote Scale
Display Cable
(optional
Scanner/Scale)
Scanner
Interface
Cable
Scale
Interface
Cable
(Scanner/Scale)
Optional
Product Reference Guide
2-27
provides physical dimensions for the AC/DC Adapter (part number 8-0582).
Figure 2-20. Physical Measurements: AC/DC Adapter
1.23"
(3.1 cm)
1.97"
(5 cm)
3.35"
(8.5 cm)
Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation
The modular Remote Display is designed so that single display heads can
be stacked to form a dual display as shown in
address the specific viewing needs of both the customer and the cashier.
Factors to consider when installing this device are:
•
•
•
Lighting Considerations
The display(s) will be easily readable unless placed in direct sunlight or other very strong light sources. Light interference will not be a factor in most installations. For best viewing, the display head(s) can each be rotated up to 180
º
around the post and/or tilted 15
º backward or forward.
2-28
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation
Viewing Angle
The optimum display angle is directly facing the viewer. Tilt and rotatioin adjustments can be made as shown in
b. To ensure that displays are easily readable for customers/cashiers of average height, display heads should be between 48” to 60” (122 to 152 cm) from the floor.
Check with local Weights and Measures authorities regarding proper positioning of scale displays used in retail trade.
NOTE
Figure 2-21. Modular/Adjustable Remote Scale Display
Dual Display
Heads
15Ëš 15Ëš
15Ëš
Upward or
Downward Tilt
180Ëš
Rotation
Single Display
Head a
Product Reference Guide
b
180Ëš
Rotation
2-29
Remote Display Cabling
NOTE
Your installation should also take into account the routing of Remote Display cabling. Ensure that distance and obstacles spanned by the routed cable will not kink, pinch or stretch it. Also keep in mind you may need to drill a hole through which to route it.
The Remote Scale Display connector end may be secured with a rubber band during shipping to prevent damage to the “lock-
). After routing the cable, remove this
rubber band before connecting. Failure to remove the band will keep the connector from latching properly.
Placing and Installing the Remote Scale Display
while performing these procedures.
1. Determine where you want to install the Remote Scale Display based on your counter design, the viewing angle, lighting consider-
ations and cable routing discussed previously. Reference
for the display’s physical dimensions. Optimally, the display(s) should be approximately eye level to the viewer(s).
2. Use the template provided in
to mark locations of the mounting screw and cable routing holes. The mounting screw holes are on 3-1/2” (85.1 mm) centers. The cable can either be routed through a
3
/4” (19 mm) diameter hole directly under the mounting
base or through the cutout in the back of the base (see
).
3. Drill the mounting screw holes using a drill bit of the appropriate diameter for your mounting screws or bolts.
4. Drill the cable routing hole using a
3
/4” (19 mm) drill bit
(optional).
2-30
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation
Figure 2-22. Physical Measurements: Remote Display
18.5mm
Dual Display
28.4mm
Single Display
60mm
329mm
292.5mm
325mm
112mm
227.5mm
60mm
112mm
264mm
116.39mm
116.39mm
25.5mm
41.99mm
85.1mm
5. Feed the entire length of the Remote Scale Display interface cable through the cable routing hole so that the assembled Remote Scale
Display can be positioned over the mounting screw holes.
6. If present, remove the rubber band from the connector end.
7. Install mounting screws or bolts to complete the installation of the
Remote Scale Display. Take care not to pinch or pierce the interface cable while securing the Remote Scale Display to the checkstand.
Product Reference Guide
2-31
Figure 2-23. Remote Scale Display Mounting
Mounting
Example
Dual Display
Heads
41.99mm
Single
Display
Head
(optional cable routing)
Figure 2-24. Remote Scale Display Mounting Template
116.39mm
2-32
85.1mm
25.5mm
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Set-Up & Installation
Changing Weighing Modes
Your scanner/scale has been programmed for weighing in either pounds or kilograms depending upon the initial operating environment that was specified when you ordered your scanner/scale. If you need to change from pounds to kilograms or vice-versa, call technical support.
You can verify that the scale is set correctly for your country’s requirements by observing that the Remote Scale Display shows the appropriate measurement symbol (lb or kg) when the power-up Selftest is completed.
LEGAL NOTE
Any time the scale weighing mode is changed, the scale must be re-calibrated before commercial use.
Set-Up & Installation
These setup and installation procedures assume that you have already prepared your checkstand to receive the scanner or scanner/scale. If you have not already made the counter cutout and routed power and interface cables, do so now as described in the previous instructions. If your checkstand has been prepared, proceed as follows:
Set-up
1. Place the scanner on the checkstand next to the counter cutout.
2. Make all connections to peripheral devices, such as the Remote
) and, if your installation includes an
EAS system, refer to that manufacturer’s instructions for connection and start-up procedures.
3. Route the cables up through the cutout and connect the scanner and scale interface cable(s), EAS cable and Remote Scale Display cable
(optional) to the scanner. Some POS terminals require two interface cables; one for the scanner interface and one for the scale interface.
for cable connection locations.
Product Reference Guide
2-33
If you have a scanner with no scale, there will be only one interface cable to the POS terminal.
4. Connect the power cord to the scanner and route the other end down through the checkstand to the AC power outlet. DO NOT plug the power cord in at this time.
Figure 2-25. Connecting Cables to the Scanner/Scale
Control Panel
Service Loop
Scanner Right Profile Scanner Left Profile
EAS Port Aux. Port Power
EAS PORT AUXILIARY PORT POWER
Connection to external EAS device.
Controls EAS deactivation system.
· Test Port
· On Screen
Programming (OSP)
· Application Download
· RS-232 Handheld
Scanner Input
· Auxiliary RS-232
Label Data Output
AC Brick Input
OR
Power off Terminal
(POT) Brick Input
Connection to this port is
Optional
POS Terminal
0.00
Remote Display Scale Host
POS TERMINAL REMOTE DISPLAY SCALE HOST
· Label Data
· Scale Data (for
single cable interfaces)
· Application Download
(where appropriate)
Drives Remote Display Scale Data (dual cable scanner/scale)
Models with scale only
Dual cable units only.
(Scale connection may be handled through
POS Terminal port)
2-34
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Set-Up & Installation
Installation
NOTE
1. Make sure that all cables are firmly attached (except that the AC/
DC power supply should not be connected to the AC outlet yet).
Reference
and
.
2. Remove the platter to gain access to the interior lift handle. Grasp
the platter in the positions shown in
from the scanner. If the top edge of the platter is blocked, you may
find it easier to grasp the platter vertical bezel as shown in
b.
illustrates an L-shaped weigh platter, which features a vertical bezel. Your platter may not contain a vertical bezel.
Figure 2-26. Removing the Platter a b
(Obstruction)
Coin
2-35
Product Reference Guide
3. Rotate the Interior Lift Handle up as shown in
and hook the fingers of both hands in the lift handles indicated. DO
NOT attempt to lift the unit using the plastic edges, scale frame, or any features other than the lift handles.
Figure 2-27. Using the Lift Handles
Interior Lift Handle
Rear Lift
Handle
4. Lower the unit into the counter opening, ensuring that none of the cables are pinched, pierced or crimped.
5. View the bubble level (if present
1
) located on the scanner's spider assembly to ensure the scanner is level. As shown in
, the air bubble should appear fully within the circle indicated. The air bubble can touch the circle, but must not overlap it. Apply shims beneath the scanner bottom or adjust the shelf to allow level installation.
2-36
1. The bubble level is present only on certain models.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Figure 2-28. Using the Bubble Level
Set-Up & Installation
Models vary and may not contain a bubble level
OK OK NO
Bubble Level
NOTE
6. Re-install the Platter and verify that it is flush or just below flush with the countertop. This is necessary to provide smooth scanning from either direction. Make adjustments as needed to align the platter with the counter by moving support rails up or down, or consider installing screws in positions that will allow their use in adjusting the unit’s position. Ensure that leveling is maintained if adjustments are made.
Failure to install a scanner/scale in a stable and level position will inhibit weighing, calibration and zeroing operations. The platter MUST make unobstructed contact with all of its supports for proper weighing operation.
7. Once installation is complete, proceed with the
procedures that follow.
Product Reference Guide
2-37
2-38
Figure 2-29. Adaptive Scale Platter Option
Some Platters have been shipped with installed spacers on their undersides at all four corners. These specially-configured Platters are provided for customers wishing to add an adaptive scale to their unit at a later date.
Until such time as the adaptive scale is installed, the four spacers should be left in place to ensure that the Platter rests evenly at its correct height when positioned on the scanner.
To remove the spacers, loosen and remove the single screw for each as
Figure 2-30. Removing the Adaptive Scale Spacers
Spacer
Platter configured for
Adaptive Scale
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
System Power-Up Recap
System Power-Up Recap
The System Power-Up procedure may vary depending upon the requirements of your POS system. It is generally a good practice to power-down
(switch off ) all equipment prior to connecting cables. Check with your
System Supervisor and/or refer to your POS terminal manual for proper power-down and power-up procedures and interface requirements when connecting any peripheral device.
If you have not identified any specific requirements for your POS system, follow these steps.
1. Power-down the POS terminal.
2. Ensure that power is disconnected from the scanner.
3. Connect the scanner and scale interface cables to your POS terminal. This connection may use one or two cables depending upon your POS terminal interface.
4. [EAS units ONLY] Connect the EAS interface cable.
SENSORMATIC EAS SYSTEMS:
Always Apply power to the EAS Controller box before powering on the scanner.
NOTE
5. Connect the Remote Display cable if your model is a scanner/scale and make any connections to optional equipment, such as a handheld scanner.
Product Reference Guide
2-39
2-40
6. Power-up the scanner or scanner/scale by connecting the power cord to an AC power outlet. Wait for the unit to complete the Self test routine (10 seconds maximum). Successful scanner power-up is signified by any or all of the following:
- Facet wheel shows movement
- Lasers turn on
- Status LED(s) turn on
- Speaker sounds tone(s)
- Remote display [if present] shows message
- A single red dot is visible on the 7-segment display
7. Power-up the POS terminal. Verify that scanning, deactivation and weighing functions are operational and that data is properly communicated between the scanner and your POS system. (Scan, deactivate and weigh a few items.) If problems are encountered, refer to
8. You have now completed installation and system integration of the scanner or scanner/scale. At this point, the scale must be calibrated and certified in accordance with the requirements of your state and/
or local requirements. Refer to
bration procedures.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Chapter 3
Operation and
Maintenance
NOTE
The information contained in this chapter describes how to operate and maintain the scanner, and optional scale and EAS systems. Topics include
“how to’s” on scanning, EAS label deactivation, weighing, re-zeroing the scale, removing the top cover and cleaning the upper and lower windows.
Scanning Items
To scan items using the scanner, slide or push them through the scan zone as shown in
. The scanner will work equally well with either a
left-to-right or right-to-left motion through the scan zone. There is rarely a need to reorient an item’s bar code since the scanner has a 360 degree view around an item.
“Limited Scanning Mode” is entered by default by interfaces such as USB and IBM until a Point Of Sale (POS) terminal enables scanning. This mode allows the scanner to read labels without a host interface enabled. The scanner will only process programming labels and emit a bad label read indication
(“chirp”) for all other labels.
3-1
Product Reference Guide
3-2
Figure 3-1. Scan Zone
Note that eyes...
...indicate what the
scanner "sees."
Vertical Window
Scan Zone
Horizontal
Window
Scan Zone
Checker Side
Scan Zone
Proper Scanning Technique
The scanner was designed to provide the ultimate in ergonomic enhancements for Point-Of-Sale (POS) scanning. To take advantage of these advancements:
Practice the techniques below to improve scanning efficiency:
•
Move the product across the horizontal window (See
).
• Since the scanner can reads labels 360 degrees around the product, don’t favor either the horizontal or vertical scan windows. Keep items in their natural orientation.
• Remember to slide or push items rather than picking them up. By avoiding any gripping, twisting and rotation of your hands and wrists, you can prevent repetitive motion injuries. This technique also relieves you from lifting possibly thousands of pounds per day.
• Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning, sharing work equally between hands.
• Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
• Develop efficient scanning motions, not necessarily faster hand movements.
• Learn typical locations for bar codes on packages; avoid “flipping” or rotating the items during scanning.
• Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area is located.
Deactivating Security Labels
EAS (Electronic Article Surveillance) labels can be detected and deactivated by a system equipped with this option. This is accomplished by means of a deactivation antenna mounted under the scanner platter. EAS labels should be brought near the antenna to be deactivated. Reference the documentation for the EAS device for more details about its installation and function.
Product Reference Guide
3-3
Proper Weighing Technique
1. The L-shaped All-Weighs™ platter allows you to place items anywhere on its surface, including leaning against its vertical section, to be weighed accurately. The “Produce Rail” or (when raised) the
“Produce Bar” also provide a convenient way to ensure items do not rest on the counter or other non-weighing surfaces. (Reference
.)
It is important that items rest entirely on the platter for their full weight to be accurately recorded.
NOTE
Figure 3-2. All-Weighs™ Platter & Item Placement
Produce
Bar Option
All-Weighs
Platter
®
Produce
Rail Option
2. Once weighed items are in place, enter PLU (price Look-Up) data as described in your POS system instructions. Item weight is displayed on the Remote Display and/or the host display.
3. Remove the item from the weigh platter.
3-4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Operational Controls
Operational Controls
The function of scanner and scale controls and indicators is listed in
Appendix A, LED/Beeper Indications & Controls
. Turn to that appendix for full details.
Operational Modes
The scanner or scanner/scale features a number of modes that are important to both the user and the system support personnel. These modes can be combined into three groups: pre-operational, operational, and additional functions. The following text describes these modes, what they mean, and how and when they are seen.
Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation
Pre-Operation describes those steps that must be successfully completed before the scanner sounds the initial good read tone and illuminates the lamps indicating the scanner and/or scale are ready for operation. These steps include Power-Up Selftest, Error Reporting, and Operational Configuration.
Power-Up/Selftest
Power-Up Selftest begins when power is applied. The scanner’s software immediately begins the testing sequence to verify that all systems are functioning properly. This routine, which only takes a few seconds, checks all the functions of the scanner, EAS deactivation system, scale, remote scale display and interface prior to indicating that it is ready for operation.
NOTE
A tone indicating Selftest is complete is a configurable feature.
See the topic
ter of this manual.
Product Reference Guide
3-5
3-6
Error Reporting
If a fatal error is detected during Selftest or operation, the unit will not advance to Normal Operation Mode. Selftest diagnostics will cause the unit to sound a long, low tone and/or display an error message on the 7segment display indicating where the failure occurred. These messages are coded to assist the repair technician in identifying the failed component.
If an error is indicated, make note of it and contact your supervisor or technical support representative. A table containing descriptions of these
.
If a non-fatal
1
error is detected (such as the loss of one of the two lasers), the unit will sound a long, low tone and display a number on the 7-segment display. The unit will advance to Normal Operating Mode, but performance may be affected until a correction or repair is made.
Operational Configuration
Once Selftest diagnostics have been successfully run, a tone is emitted (if configured to do so, and the unit enters an operational configuration state.
The scanner or scanner/scale will automatically load your specific interface settings which are required to communicate with the host system. There are two conditions that must be met before the unit can enter Operating
Mode:
• No bar code label can be in the scan volume while the unit is in this state. Progress is halted until the label has been removed, thereby ensuring that no extraneous bar code data is send to the host.
• If your scanner has a scale, the scale cannot be in motion (usually caused by excessive vibration in the checkstand) for this test to succeed. A “Scale in Motion” status will be indicated by displaying a period and the applicable weight unit (lb kg
. kg
) that is selected.
. lb
or
• The scale must be able to “capture” zero weight. The
- 0 display will be seen if there is a weight on the platter at power-up. Removing the weight or pressing the Scale Zero Push
Button should allow the scale to find zero.
1. Scanner behavior under non-fatal error conditions is configurable. See
6, Programming for more details.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Operational Modes
• When the scanner or scanner/scale completes its Selftest successfully, it emits a tone (when configured to do so) and enters Operating
Mode.
Operating Mode
Operating Mode includes Normal Operation (scanning, EAS deactivation and weighing) and Sleep Mode. These two modes are most commonly observed by the user/operator.
Normal Operation
This condition is indicated by the scanner green LED being on dim and steady. For scanner/scale models, the scale yellow LED indicates that the scale senses a weight of zero on the platter. If you have a scanner without scale model, the yellow lamp will not be lit when the scanner is ready for scanning.
Yellow and Green LED indications are configurable. Your scanner may not be programmed to operate in the standard manner described above.
NOTE
Once the scanner enters Normal Operation, it begins a countdown sequence. If there is no activity during a preset period of time (also called time-out
1
), the unit will shut off the laser and/or motor in order to prolong the life of the electrical and mechanical components. Once the scanner has timed out, it enters Sleep Mode.
Product Reference Guide
1. “Timeout” and “Sleep Mode” time delays are programmable features that can be selected through use of the programming labels included in
.
3-7
Sleep Mode
After the scanner has been left idle for a preset period of time, the laser and/or motor automatically turns off (goes to sleep). This state is called
Sleep Mode, and is indicated by a “slow” blink of the green light (blinking at a 2-second rate). To wake up the unit, press anywhere on the weigh platter (scanner/scale models only), press the Volume Selection switch or wave your hand over the horizontal window. The unit will recognize any of these signals as a wake-up call and instantly return to Normal Operation.
Additional Functions
Additional scanner and scale functions include programming, running scanner or scale diagnostics, initiating a reset, zeroing the scale, and calibrating the scale.
Programming
When your scanner or scanner/scale is shipped from the factory it is configured to work with the POS system interface at your store and read the bar code symbologies you designated. If you need to change this configuration information for any reason,
, contains special bar code labels for changing the unit’s settings.
Diagnostic Mode
, for details about running scan-
ner and scale diagnostics. Turn to
description of error codes resulting from diagnostics.
3-8
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Additional Functions
Scanner and Scale Reset
The reset procedures and indicators are identical for scanner and scanner/ scale models. As with any electronic equipment, it is sometimes necessary to reset the electronics. The reset procedure allows you to initiate a reset command to the scanner. This may be necessary if the POS terminal has been switched off or the store system has been reset while the unit is on.
Reset can also be used to initiate and run the unit’s internal Selftest routine.
Pressing and holding the Volume/Tone Push Button for approximately eight seconds initiates a reset, which is sounded by a rapid number of beeps. If the motor had been spinning, the lamps will blink while the motor spins down. At that point, the motor will spin back up and the scanner will continue to run the Selftest diagnostics. For more informa-
Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation
chapter.
Scale Adjustments
The scale allows two user adjustments: zeroing and calibration. The first, and most frequently performed, is ‘zeroing’ the scale. This operation resets the scale’s “at rest” reading to zero which must be within the range of - 0.2 pounds (- 0.09kg) to +0.6 pounds (0.27kg) since the last calibration.
While the ‘at rest’ reading remains within the zero range, the scale will automatically adjust itself to true zero. The scale also automatically zeros itself on power-up if the weight present on the scale is within these defined limits.
Zeroing the Scale
The zeroing operation may be performed by checkers and other store personnel. Pressing and releasing the Scale Zero Push Button should return the scale to Normal Operation. If the zero point moves out of the zero range due to debris accumulation or other causes, pressing the Scale Zero
Push Button will not reset the zero point. In this case the weigh platter must be cleaned, debris chutes cleared of debris or the scale must be recalibrated.
Product Reference Guide
3-9
3-10
With the scanner/scale powered-up and at operating temperature:
1. Remove everything from the weighing surface of the scanner/scale.
2. Press the Scale Zero Push Button. (See
).
3. The Zero
1
light will turn on and the display will show 0.00 lb
(0.000 kg). If it does not, see
4. You have completed the scale zeroing function.
Calibrating the Scale
The second adjustment, calibration, defines and sets a standard reference weight range against which all product weights are compared. If your scale is set for weighing in pounds, this range is 0 - 30 pounds, and, if your scale is set for weighing in kilograms, the range is 0 - 15 kilograms. The scale must be calibrated upon initial installation, whenever the scale cannot be zeroed, when the scale diagnostics indicate a calibration error, when the weighing measure (pounds or kilograms) is changed, or when the scale module has been replaced.
Normally, once the scale has been calibrated, the calibration must be verified and/or approved by a local regulatory body. In many areas of the
United States, the scale calibration switch must be sealed before being placed into service. Consult the agency responsible for regulating weighing devices in your area to ensure that you are meeting all legal and regulatory requirements.
sequence and verification process.
Calibration can only be performed if the tamper seal that secures access to the Calibration Switch is broken and the switch cover is removed. Breaking the seal may legally render the scale inoperable until it has been recertified and a new seal attached. Consult your local regulations before removing the calibration seal if you are unsure of the legal requirements.
Although the scale will physically continue to weigh products, a broken seal may require recertification by a proper authority as designated by your local laws.
1. Zero light operation is configurable.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Operational Maintenance
Operational Maintenance
The scanner or scanner/scale will provide dependable service for many years. The following maintenance procedures will keep your scanner or scanner/scale operating at peak performance.
Cleaning the Platter and Scan Windows
.
Clean the exterior surfaces of the horizontal and vertical scan windows at least twice daily with a nonabrasive, mild, water-based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint-free cleaning tissues. The textured plastic surfaces and stainless steel can also be cleaned using the same cleaning agents.
Cleaning the Air Gap/Debris Chutes & Drip Rail. Daily, clear the debris chutes between the platter and the outer housing. Most items can be cleared from the debris chutes by carefully running a thin stiff object like a credit card along all sides of the weighing surface. If necessary, remove the top cover to clear the debris chutes and drip rail.
Product Reference Guide
3-11
Vertical Scan Window Replacement
The Vertical Scan Window is a replaceable part. Follow the instructions below to remove and replace a standard or L-Platter Vertical Scan Window.
Standard Vertical Scan Window Removal
1. Lift up on the vertical bezel as shown in
Figure 3-3 a and tilt its top up and away from the scanner as shown in
b.
Figure 3-3. Removing/Reinstalling the Vertical Bezel
a
Retention
Tabs
b
3-12
c d
2. Press from the opposite side to release the edge of the Vertical Scan
Window from the two retention tabs shown in
c.
3. Slide the window from the bezel as shown in
fully dispose of any damaged glass.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
a
Operational Maintenance
4. Fully seat the new Vertical Scan Window into the window channel, engaging it within the retention tabs. Reference
c.
5. Clean both sides of the new Vertical Scan Window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, waterbased glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.
6. Tilt in the bezel to seat the two ears at the bottom corners of the bezel into their holes in the scanner and push in on the top of the bezel to securely snap it in place (see
Window replacement is now complete.
L-Platter Vertical Scan Window Removal
1. Grasp the platter as shown in
scanner.
Figure 3-4. L-Platter Removal/Reinstallation b
(Obstruction)
Coin
3-13
Product Reference Guide
NOTE
2. If the top edge of the platter is blocked, you may find it easier to use a coin to lift up an edge of the platter as shown in
b, then grasp the platter vertical bezel or other exposed edge.
Use caution to avoid damage to the now exposed horizontal and Vertical Scan Windows. If cleaning of these windows is necessary, use a nonabrasive, mild, water-based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint-free cleaning tissues and take care to avoid scratching these windows (damage to the windows can degrade scanning performance).
3. The Vertical Scan Window is held in place by two tabs each on its top and bottom edges. To remove it, carefully push out on the top as
and lift it out. Carefully dispose of any damaged glass.
Figure 3-5. Vertical Scan Window Removal/Replacement
L-Shaped
Platter
Vertical
Bezel
3-14
Vertical
Window
4. Fully seat the new Vertical Scan Window into the window channel within its bottom retention tabs. Tilt the window in to engage the two tabs at the top of the retainer and carefully snap the window to secure it in place.
5. Clean both sides of the new Vertical Scan Window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, waterbased glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Operational Maintenance
6. Re-install the platter. Vertical Scan Window replacement is now complete.
Horizontal Scan Window Replacement (WRG)
Wear Resistant Glass (WRG) horizontal scan windows are replaceable and can be removed and replaced following the instructions below.
Sapphire glass does not require replacement, so it is permanently fastened in place. Do not attempt to remove Sapphire glass from the platter.
NOTE
1. Remove the Platter from the scanner as shown in
.
2. Turn the platter upside down on a clean, dry surface and remove the two screws shown in
Figure 3-6 a. Retain the screws for later re-
installation.
3. Tilt the Window Retainer up and away from the platter as shown.
4. Lift out the Window Gasket and WRG Window from the Platter as
b and carefully dispose of any damaged glass.
5. Position the new WRG Window and its gasket as shown in
b.
6. Guide the Window Retainer to seat its edge under the tabs and match the screw holes as shown in
7. Secure the retainer in position using the original two screws.
8. Clean both sides of the new WRG window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water-based glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.
9. Re-install the platter. WRG Window replacement is now complete.
Product Reference Guide
3-15
3-16 a
Window
Retainer
Figure 3-6. Removing/Replacing the WRG Window b
Window
Gasket
WRG
Window
Platter
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Chapter 4
Problem Isolation
In the event of a suspected functional problem, use the troubleshooting references provided in this chapter. This useful information will help you to identify and resolve the cause of the problem.
The scanner/scale has a number of features that indicate when a scanner or scale problem occurs. The unit may:
• emit a series of tones
• light the 7-segment (FRU status) display
• flash one or more LEDs
• display error codes on the Remote Display (if installed)
Three error reporting modes are used: Power-Up Selftest, Operational tests and Diagnostic tests. These test sequences are explained on the following pages.
Power-Up Selftest
The Power-up Selftest is a pre-operational series of tests that must be successfully completed before the scanner indicates readiness for operation.
This pre-operational period is the time between power-up and normal operation during which the motor comes up-to-speed and software, firmware and hardware are being tested. These tests ensure that all subsystems are fully functional before turning on the Visible Laser Diode (VLD).
for a more detailed description of
this and other scanner and scale modes.
4-1
Product Reference Guide
Operational Tests
These are the tests that run continually during Normal Operation and
Sleep Mode. Firmware checks all subsystems, accessory connections and the POS interface to verify everything is operating normally. If a problem is detected at any time, a long, low tone is sounded, an error code is shown on the 7-segment display, and operation may be halted. If you press the
Volume/Tone Push Button at that time, a series of tones will be sounded that matches the error code displayed.
Diagnostic Tests
, for details about running diagnostic
tests for the scanner and/or scale. If a problem is discovered during diagnostics, the scanner will provide feedback about the source of the problem. The remainder of this chapter describes these failure indications and includes troubleshooting flowcharts to help isolate the problem.
Diagnostic Procedures
Your Point-Of-Sale (POS) system may contain many components that operate as a system. Since almost all scanner or scale problems are caused by either the scanner, scale, POS terminal or communication links between them, these troubleshooting flowcharts focus on these components. Additionally, the optional Remote Scale Display, AC/DC Power
Supply and their cables are potential problems addressed in this chapter.
The flowcharts provided in this chapter walk you through a diagnostic process that will isolate the failed component and instruct as to the corrective action required. Since internal scanner and scale components cannot be replaced by an operator or installer, most functional errors will require the assistance of a trained technical support person. However, if the problem is caused by faulty cable, power supply or remote display, you can fix the problem by replacing the defective component and complete the installation.
4-2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Error Codes
Error Codes
If an error is detected, the scanner will sound a long low tone (for one second) and alternately flash its LEDs, indicating a failure. Following the long low tone, an error code will appear on the 7-segment display (refer to
). Pressing the Volume/Tone Push button will cause the scanner
to sound a series of beeps corresponding to that error code.
the following page describes what these codes mean and what action should be taken for each.
NOTE
When troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connections first before proceeding with other problem isolation steps.
Product Reference Guide
4-3
Table 4-1. Error Codes
Error
Code
Probable Cause Corrective Action
0
Blinking
1
Configuration
Configuration Error
No POS interface has been selected (Null interface). See
Chapter 6, Interface Type to select the required interface
using programming bar codes.
, for details about configuring the scanner using programming bar codes.
Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.
Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.
2
3
4
Interface Board
Motor
Horizontal Laser a
Call technical support personnel.
5
6
7
8
A
Vertical Laser
Digital Board
Scale
Remote Display
Control Button
Stuck
Call technical support personnel.
Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.
See the topic Scale Error Reporting
in this chapter for problem identification and corrective actions.
Connect the Remote Display. If necessary, replace display or cable. Alternatively, you can disable the Remote Display
using the programming procedures described in Chapter 6 .
Check to see if either of the buttons is stuck; free it if possible. If neither button is stuck, call technical support personnel.
Call technical support personnel.
Calibrate scale or call technical support personnel.
B
C
Hardware ID
Scale Calibration
E CPLD ID Call technical support personnel.
Decimal
Point
3.3 V Present If not lit, call technical support personnel a. If only one laser is non-functional, the scanner may continue to work (this is a configurable feature); however, the 7-segment display will show the error code indicating the failed laser. If both lasers have failed, the 7-segment display will display either a 4 or a 5, and the scanner will cease to function until serviced. No alternate blinking of lamps will occur if only one laser has failed.
4-4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Figure 4-1. 7-Segment LED Display
Vertical
Window
Error Codes
Seven-Segment
Display
Horizontal
Window
Product Reference Guide
4-5
Scale Error Reporting
Scale diagnostics uses the Remote Scale Display and the Zero Status lamp to communicate specific scale failures. The following chart shows the
Remote Display messages, the Scale Status lamp indication, the problem that the scale is experiencing and what action should be taken. When troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connections first before proceeding with other problem isolation steps.
Remote
Display
E _1
E__2
E__3
E__4
E__5
Scale Status
Lamp
Flash, pause, 1 blink, long pause, repeat sequence.
Flash, pause, 2 blinks, long pause, repeat sequence.
Flash, pause, 3 blinks, long pause, repeat sequence.
Flash, pause, 4 blinks, long pause, repeat sequence.
Flash, pause, 5 blinks, long pause, repeat sequence.
Problem
Description
Too much motion at power-up.
Calibration lost.
Scale communication lost. Internal scanner/ scale problem.
Scale module failure.
Internal software fault.
Other Scale Reporting
Action Required
Check for stable installation.
Scale may require calibration.
Call technical support personnel. Re-calibrate; restart; recertify (if required).
Call technical support personnel; report error.
Call technical support personnel; report error.
Call technical support personnel; report error.
4-6
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Flowcharts
Remote
Display
- 0 Off
Scale Status
Lamp
Problem
Description
Action Required
Cannot zero at power- up or weight remains on scale for more than
2 minutes or weight has not returned to zero between POS weight requests a
.
- Check debris chutes.
- Verify that the weigh platter moves freely.
- Remove item(s) from scale
- Press Scale Zero Push Button
- for more information.
- If the scale still fails to zero, recalibrate the scale.
a. This is a configurable feature.
Flowcharts
The problem isolation flowcharts on the following pages allow you to identify and troubleshoot problems with your system.
Product Reference Guide
4-7
4-8
Figure 4-2. Problem Isolation: Start
Power-up
Scanner power-up is signified by any or all of the following:
- Facet wheel shows movement
- Lasers turn on
- Status LED(s) turn on
- Speaker sounds tone(s)
- Remote display shows message
- A single red dot is visible on the 7-
segment display
Flashing Green LED
If the Green LED is flashing slowly, the scanner is most likely in Sleep Mode.
Press and release the Volume/Tone
Push Button or wave your hand in front of the vertical window to "wake-up" the scanner.
A flashing Green LED can also mean the scanner has been disabled by the
POS terminal. To exit this mode, cycle power or have the terminal re-enable the scanner.
Selftest Failure
If the scanner fails its Selftest, the following takes place:
- Speaker sounds a tone at the lowest value for approx. 3 seconds.
- Green and Yellow LEDs flash on and off alternately.
- 7-segment display shows a code (1 to
9) to indicate the failure.
Consult the Selftest flowchart if you're unsure the unit has passed Selftest.
START
For units using an AC/DC adapter, verify that...
1. AC power cord is connected to a functional AC outlet.
2. IEC connectors are firmly connected.
3. DC power cord is firmly connected to scanner.
If your unit is a model which receives Power Off the
Terminal POT), verify that the I/F cable is securely connected at both ends.
Does the scanner power-up
?
YES
NO
Power
Supply
?
NO
Have you checked the power connections
YES
Is the
Green LED
Lit
?
YES
NO
Ensure the Green LED is enabled via programming bar codes.
Does the scanner pass Selftest
?
NO
Go to Selftest flowchart
YES
Check these potential problems:
- AC power cord
- AC/DC adaptor
- AC outlet
Is the
Green LED
Lit
?
YES
NO
Call Tech Support
Will the scanner read bar codes reliably
?
NO
YES
Go to Poor/No
Reading flowchart
Does the
EAS
1
Antenna deactivate tags
?
NO
YES
Go to EAS System flowchart
Does the scale
1
weigh correctly
?
NO
Go to Scale flowchart
Other Problems?
Call Tech Support
1
EAS and scale are product options
which may not be present at your
installation.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Figure 4-3. Problem Isolation: Selftest
SELFTEST
START
Does the
7-segment display show
0
?
YES
NO
No interface selected
(Null Interface).
Select an interface.
Does the
7-segment display show
1.
?
NO
YES
Scan the Factory
Defaults bar code in
Section 6 to enable the default configuration file. Restart the unit.
Does the
7-segment display show
1.
?
NO
YES
Does the
7-segment display show
2. or 3.
?
NO
YES
Does the
7-segment display show
4. or 5.
NO
?
Call Tech Support
YES
Error code 4. indicates a failed horizontal VLDM (laser) assembly, while 5. indicates a failed vertical
VLDM. If configured to do so1, the scanner will remain operational with only one of these lasers until the unit can be serviced. If both lasers have failed, the unit will no longer function.
Does the
7-segment display show
7.
?
NO
YES
Call Tech Support
Go to EAS System flowchart
YES
Does the
7-segment display show
9.
?
NO
NO
Does the
7-segment display show
8.
?
YES
Go to Remote Display flowchart
Does the
Remote Display show -0- or an error
(E__#)
?
NO
YES
Go to Scale flowchart
Unit passes Selftest
1 Refer to the feature Laser Failure
Mode in Section 6.
Flowcharts
Product Reference Guide
4-9
Figure 4-4. Problem Isolation: Poor/No Reading
Have you verified that all scan windows are clean and scratch-free?
POOR/NO READING
START
A good read is signified by one flash of the Green
LED and a single beep 1 .
Enter Scanner Diagnostic Mode by holding the Volume/Tone Push
Button for 4 seconds (until first 3, and then 6 rapid tones are sounded) then release. Scan a known-good bar code.
NO
Does the scanner read the bar code satisfactorily
?
YES
Reset the scanner by holding down the
Volume/Tone Push Button for 8 seconds.
Before proceeding, verify that bar code samples presented to scanner are of good quality and a symbology the scanner can read.
Call Tech Support
If unexpected data is being sent from the host to the scanner, consider enabling the programmable feature Ignore Host
Commands to debug the system.
Does the scanner pass the data to the POS
?
NO
YES
Go to No Transmit to
POS flowchart
Does the scanner read satisfactorily
?
NO
YES
Verify programmable parameters using the information and programming bar codes provided in Section
6. Check bar code symbology options and other configurable features.
DONE
Does the scanner read satisfactorily
?
NO
YES
Troubleshoot the host or call
Tech Support.
DONE
1
Green and Yellow LEDs and beeper indications are configurable
features. Behavior may vary from that described here.
4-10
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Figure 4-5. Problem Isolation: No Transmit to POS
Flowcharts
NO TRANSMIT TO POS
START
Check the interface (I/F) cable connections. If possible, retest the system using a knowngood I/F cable.
Verify programmable parameters using the information and programming bar codes provided in Section
6. Check interface and I/F options, inactive symbologies and other configurable features.
Does the scanner pass the data to the POS
?
YES
NO
DONE
Does the scanner read satisfactorily
?
NO
YES
DONE
Troubleshoot the host or call
Tech Support.
Product Reference Guide
4-11
4-12
Figure 4-6. Problem Isolation: Scale
SCALE START
View the Remote
Display and/or the
Yellow scale status LED for the scale error code.
Reference the topic,
Scale Error Reporting in
Section 4 for more information.
If this is a new installation, make sure any foam packing pieces have been removed from the scale cavity before proceeding. Lift off the platter to verify, then set the platter back into position.
-0shown on
RemoteDisplay/
Yellow
LED off
?
NO
YES
- Check for debris under platter.
- Verify that the weigh platter
moves freely.
- Remove item(s) from scale.
- Press Scale Zero Button
- If the scale still fails to zero,
recalibrate the scale.
E__1 shown on
Remote Display/
Yellow LED
Flash once
?
NO
YES
Problem is too much motion at power-up.
Correct excess vibration in counter if possible.
E__2 shown on
Remote Display/
Yellow LED
Flash twice
?
NO
YES
Problem is calibration lost. Recalibrate the scale using the procedures in
Section 5.
E__3 shown on
RemoteDisplay/
Yellow LED Flash
NO
3 times
?
YES
E__4 shown on Remote
Display/Yellow LED Flash
4 times. Problem is Scale
Load Cell failure.
Problem is scale communication lost.
Verify cable connections to/from the scale.
Call Tech Support
NO
Is problem fixed
?
Calibrate scale.
NO
Is problem fixed
?
NO
Will the scale calibrate
?
Is problem fixed
?
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
Call Tech Support
DONE
DONE
DONE
DONE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Flowcharts
Figure 4-7. Problem Isolation: Remote Display
REMOTE DISPLAY
START
Is the unit configured for a Remote
Display
?
YES
NO
Verify that the Remote
Display cable is securely attached to the external
Remote Display port and reset the scanner.
NO
Scanner-scale models that include a Remote Display when shipped from the factory, are configured for use with the display. If you're unsure of the settings for your unit, contact Tech Support.
Use the programming bar codes in Section 6 to enable operation using a
Remote Display.
Is the problem fixed
?
YES
DONE
Is the problem fixed
?
YES
NO
Re-connect using a known-good Remote
Display. Reset the scanner and retest.
DONE
Is the problem fixed
?
NO
YES
Replace the
Remote Display
Call Tech Support
Product Reference Guide
4-13
4-14
Figure 4-8. Problem Isolation: EAS System
NO EAS DEACTIVATION
START
Check all EAS cable connections.
Before proceeding, verify the EAS
Antenna and associated equipment have been correctly installed (ref.
Chapter 2). Ensure operator has been trained in proper EAS system use (ref. Chapter 3).
Verify programmable parameters using the information and programming bar codes provided in Section
6. Check EAS options, and other configurable features.
Does the
EAS Antenna deactivate labels
?
YES
NO
If possible, retest the system substituting known-good EAS cable and/or other EAS equipment.
Does the
EAS Antenna deactivate labels
?
YES
NO
DONE
YES
Does the
EAS Antenna deactivate labels
?
NO
DONE
Call Tech Support.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Chapter 5
Calibration
A number of situations require the scale to be calibrated. They are:
• at initial installation of the scanner/scale
• if the scale cannot be re-zeroed
• if you change the weight measure from pounds to kilograms or viceversa
• if diagnostics indicate a calibration error
• the weigh module has been replaced
LEGAL NOTE
Follow the procedures on the following pages to ensure that the scanner/ scale will meet Weights and Measurement requirements.
Certification of the scanner/scale’s weighing apparatus is subject to Federal, State and Local Weights and Measures statutes and is restricted to authorized government agencies and/or duly registered agents thereof. Anytime a scale is calibrated, it should be properly sealed with a lead and wire or paper seal before being placed into service.
It is your responsibility to check with the appropriate authorities in your area to ensure compliance with pertinent regulations before removing any official seals or placing a newly calibrated scanner/scale into service.
5-1
Product Reference Guide
Description of Calibration Sequence
The Calibration Sequence sets the scale to an accurate reference point for weighing. This process involves the use of a Field Standard Weight Set
(31.5-pounds) for calibration in pounds, (18.5-kilograms) for Metric.
Once calibration has been successfully completed, the scanner/scale uses the certified weight as a reference for subsequent weighing activities.
These verification procedures follow the U.S. National Institute of Stan-
dards and Technology 44 Handbook guidelines for bench/counter scale installations.
If any of these tests fail to meet the required weight indications, you must calibrate the scanner/scale. Refer to the calibration procedures in this chapter for the proper procedures.
You may be required by state and/or local regulations to have procedures other than these performed by a certified technician or verification official.
Access to the calibration switch should be restricted with a paper or a wire and lead seal after the calibration has been performed if required by your local regulatory agency.
The Calibration Sequence must be performed without removing the scanner/scale from its installed position.
NOTE
5-2
The following tools and supplies will be required to perform the calibration process:
• 31.5 pound Field Standard Weight Set
1
.
(English calibration only).
• 18.5 kilogram Field Standard Weight Set
2
.
(Metric calibration only).
• Lead/Wire or Paper Seal (as required by law).
1. NOTE: Throughout the calibration procedures, specified weights may be achieved by using a combination of weights from this set. eg. 20 lbs may be made up of one 10.00 lb. weight and two 5.00 lb. weights.
2. NOTE: Throughout the calibration procedures, specific weights may be achieved by using a combination of weights from this set. eg. 10 kgs. may be made up of one 5.00 kg. and five 1.00 kg. weights.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Motion Test
Motion Test
This test verifies that the scale will not ‘zero’ when the weighing surface of the scanner/scale is in motion.
1. Verify that the Yellow LED
1
is on and the Remote Display reads
0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilograms.
2. Press lightly on the weigh platter of the scanner/scale with one hand and at the same time press and release the Zero Push Button on the operator’s panel. The Yellow LED should turn Off and the Remote
Display should not display 0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilograms.
3. Remove your hand from the weighing platform and verify that the
Yellow LED is On and the Remote Display reads 0.00 pounds or
0.000 kilograms.
Automatic Zero Tracking Test
NOTE
This test verifies that the scanner/scale automatic zero tracking mechanism is operating correctly.
1. Place 0.006 pounds (3 grams for metric) on the center of the weighing platform. The entire weight must be placed on the weighing platform at once for this test to be valid. The Yellow LED should go
Off and the Remote Display should read 0.01 pounds (0.005 kilograms).
The scanner/scale has an adaptive zero capture mechanism that re-zeros the scale over time if there is a slow change in the zero level; thus if all the weight is not placed on the weighing surface at one time, the Yellow LED will remain On and the
Remote Display will read 0.00 pounds (0.000 kilograms). When the weight is removed, the Yellow LED will turn off and the display will show a minus sign ton to re-zero the scale.
. lb
. Press the Zero Push But-
Product Reference Guide
1. Yellow LED indications can be configured via feature programming and may not be enabled for certain functions.
5-3
Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration
1. Assure that the scanner/scale is stable, secure and properly installed.
Chapter 2, Site Preparation and Installation
tions on the proper installation of the scanner/scale).
2. Power-up the scanner/scale.
3. Allow the unit to reach temperature equilibrium for at least one hour. If the scanner/scale is already at room temperature, allow at least 15 minutes for acclimatization.
4. Remove all weight from the weighing surface and ensure that there are no obstructions in the debris chutes of the scanner/scale. See
.
Do not pay attention to any message on the POS display.
NOTE
Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms)
1. Before proceeding, ensure that the scanner/scale has been prepared
for this process by performing the preceding steps titled,
Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration
2. Remove the weigh platter and make sure that there are no obstructions in the debris chutes.
3. Cut and remove the seal that secures the calibration switch access cover as shown in
. The seal may not be present if this is the initial installation of the scanner/scale.
5-4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms)
Figure 5-1. Calibration Switch Access
Spider
Calibration
Switch
4. Press and release the Calibration Switch to place the scanner/scale in
Calibration Mode. (The scanner/scale will sound a a series of rapid beeps indicating it is in Calibration Mode.) If the motor was spinning when you initiated Calibration Mode, the motor will stop and the Yellow LED will begin flashing indicating the scale is in Calibration Mode. The Remote Display (if one is present) will show the mes-
sage “ESCL” (empty scale).
5. Reinstall the weigh platter.
6. Press the Zero Push Button. The Yellow LED will go out for approximately 10 seconds (or less). If one is present, the Remote Dis-
play will alternately display
is ready to proceed.
and until the scale
7. When the scale is ready, the Yellow LED will begin blinking again.
The Remote Display (if one is present) will show the message “Ad20
(add twenty pounds)” or “Ad10 (add ten kilograms).” (The scanner/ scale will also sound one tone if the scale is weighing in kilograms or two tones for pounds.) Place the correct weight (twenty pounds for calibration in pounds, or ten kilograms for metric calibration) from the Field Standard Weight set on the center of the weighing area and press the Zero Push Button again.
Product Reference Guide
5-5
5-6
8. The Yellow LED will extinguish for approximately 10 seconds and,
if one is present, the Remote Display will alternately display and
until the scale is ready to proceed.
9. If the calibration was successful, (the speaker sounds a single tone), the Scale Status LED begins blinking again, and “End-” appears in
the Remote Display (if one is present).
10. If the calibration was not successful, the speaker will sound five tones indicating a scale failure, and the Scale Status LED will blink twice, strobe (fast blinks) and then continually repeat this sequence until reset. Remove all weight from the Weigh Platter, and repeat
the procedure starting with step
11. Press the Zero Push Button again to permanently store the calibration data and exit Calibration Mode. You have completed the calibration of the scanner/scale. The unit’s calibration must now be verified as required by state and/or local weights and measures regulations. The verification procedure must be performed to assure that a scale will pass Weights and Measures requirements before it is placed into commercial/retail service.
You have completed the scale calibration procedure. You must now continue with the calibration verification tests to complete the scale’s calibration. If you are weighing in pounds, continue with the following procedures to verify that the scale was successfully calibrated and that it weighs properly. If you are weighing in kilograms, turn to the instructions titled,
Calibration Verification (Kilograms)
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds)
Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds)
Once you have completed the calibration sequence, you may be required to perform these step-by-step verification procedures. These procedures follow the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook-44 guidelines for grocery scale installations. You may be required by state or local law to have these procedures performed by a certified technician or verified by a proper official.
These calibration verification procedures cover five different tests:
• Increasing-Load Test
• Shift Test
• Blanking Test
• Decreasing-Load Test
• Return to Zero Test
Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1)
This test checks Scale operation with five, ten and fifteen pound weights.
1. Check that the display reads 0.00 lb. when at rest with nothing on the weighing surface. (The Yellow LED is steadily lit).
2. Place a five-pound weight on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 5.00 lb.
3. Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 9.99 and 10.01 lb.
4. Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 14.99 and 15.01.
Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.00.
5. You have completed the Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1).
Product Reference Guide
5-7
Shift Test
The Shift Test checks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weigh-
ing surface of the scanner/scale are weighed properly. Refer to
when performing this test.
1. Place and remove in succession, a ten-pound load on the center of each of the four quadrants (1, 2, 3, and 4 in Figure 5-2) of the scanner/scale’s weigh platter. Verify that a reading of between 9.99 and
10.01 lb registers under load and that the display returns to 0.00 between each load.
2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant of the weighing surface, remove all weight from the scale. You have completed the Shift
Test.
Figure 5-2. Shift Test
1
4
2
3
1
4
2
3
5-8
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds)
Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2)
NOTE
After completing the Shift Test, you must complete the Increasing Load
Test using 20.0, 25.0 and 30.0 pounds of weight.
The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type and may not necessarily be set at 30 pounds, which is the standard setting. For this test, continue to place weights in five pound increments only up to the upper weight limit set for your scale.
1. With the scale starting at zero, place 20.0 pounds in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 19.99 and 20.01 lb.
2. Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing surface, increasing the load to 25.0 pounds and check that the display reads between 24.99 and 25.01 lb.
3. Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing surface increasing the load to 30.0 pounds and check that the display reads between 29.99 and 30.01 lb.
4. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.00.
Blanking Test
This test ensures that the scanner/scale will indicate its weighing capability has been exceeded if a weight greater than 0.05 pounds over its maximum upper weight limit is placed upon the unit.
1. Place weights that total the upper weight limit plus 0.051 pounds on the scale. For example: If the upper limit is set at 30 pounds, place weights equaling 30.051 pounds.
2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens (_ - - -). This is the overweight indication.
The scanner/scale may blank (show an underscore and three hyphens) at any weight greater than its upper limit, but must blank when the upper limit plus 0.051 pounds are set upon the weighing surface.
NOTE
Product Reference Guide
5-9
Decreasing-Load Test
This test ensures that the scanner/scale responds properly when a heavy object is followed by a significantly smaller object.
1. Place a 30.0-pound load on the scale and verify that the display shows between 29.99 and 30.01 pounds.
If the upper weight limit for your scale is not set at 30 pounds, begin by placing weight equaling your upper limit setting.
NOTE
2. Remove weights to leave 20 pounds on the scale. Check that the display shows between 19.99 and 20.01.
3. Remove another 15.0 pounds from the scale and check that the scale reads 5.00 lb.
4. You have completed the Decreasing Load Test.
Return to Zero Test
This test ensures that, after all other tests have been completed successfully, the scanner/scale returns to zero. Remove all weights from the scale and verify that the scale reads 0.00 lb.
After completing this test, close the calibration access cover and seal per local Weights and Measures requirements. This final step must agree with the legal requirements of your state or local government.
You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing in pounds.
If the scanner/scale passes all these tests,
1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and install a seal (if required).
2. Reinstall the weigh platter.
If the scanner/scale fails any of these tests, it should be serviced by a qualified technician.
5-10
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Calibration Verification (Kilograms)
Calibration Verification (Kilograms)
Once you have completed the calibration sequence, you may be required to perform these step-by-step verification procedures. These procedures follow the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook-44 guidelines for grocery scale installations. You may be required by state or local law to have these procedures performed by a certified technician or verified by a proper official.
These calibration verification procedures cover five different tests:
• Increasing-Load Test
• Shift Test
• Blanking Test
• Decreasing-Load Test
• Return to Zero Test
Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1)
This test checks Scale operation for increasing loads from 0.100 kg and
7.50 kg.
1. Check that the display reads 0.000 kg when at rest with nothing on the weighing surface. (The Yellow LED is steadily lit).
2. Place a 100 gram weight on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.100 kg.
3. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.300 kg.
4. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.500 kg.
5. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.600 kg.
6. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.700 kg.
7. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.800 kg.
Product Reference Guide
5-11
8. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 1.000 kg.
9. Increase the weight on the scale to 7.50 kg on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 7.495 and 7.505 kg.
10. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.000 kg. You have completed the Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1).
Shift Test (Metric)
The Shift Test checks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weigh-
ing surface of the scanner/scale are weighed properly. Refer to
when performing this test.
1. Place and remove in succession, a 5.0 kilogram load on the center of
each of the four quadrants (2, 3, 4, and 5 in
) and in the center (1) of the scanner/scale’s weighing platform. Verify that the display shows a reading of between 4.995 and 5.005 kg for each quadrant/center test and that the display returns to 0.000 between each load.
2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant and the center of the weighing surface, remove all weight from the scale. You have completed the Shift Test.
Figure 5-3. European Shift Test (Metric)
2
5
1
3
4
2 3
5
1
4
5-12
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Calibration Verification (Kilograms)
Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2)
NOTE
After completing the Shift Test, you must complete the Increasing Load
Test using 10.00, 12.50 and 15 kilograms of weight.
The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type and may not necessarily be set at 15 kilograms, which is the standard setting. For this test, continue to place weights in 2.50 kilgram increments only up to the upper weight limit set for your scale.
1. Place 10.00 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 9.990 kg and 10.010 kg.
2. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 12.490 kg and 12.510 kg.
3. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 14.990 kg and 15.010 kg.
4. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.000 kg.
5. You have completed phase two of the increasing load test.
Blanking Test
This test ensures that the scanner/scale will indicate its weighing capability has been exceeded if a weight greater than 0.82 over its maximum upper weight limit is placed upon the unit.
1. Place weights that total the upper limit plus 0.82 kilograms on the weigh platter. For example: If the upper limit is set at 15 kilograms, place weights equaling 15.82 kilograms.
2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens ( _ - - -).
This is the overweight indication.
The scanner/scale may blank (show an underscore and three hyphens) at any weight greater than its upper limit, but must blank when the upper limit plus 0.82 pounds are set upon the weighing surface.
NOTE
Product Reference Guide
5-13
Decreasing-Load Test
This test ensures that the scanner/scale responds properly when a heavy object is followed by a significantly smaller object.
1. Place weights that total 15.8 kilograms.
If the upper weight limit for your scale is not set at 15 kilograms, begin by placing weight equaling your upper limit setting plus 0.8 kilograms.
NOTE
2. Remove weights to leave 10 kilograms on the scale and verify that the display shows between 9.990 and 10.010 kilograms.
3. Remove an additional 9.00 kilograms from the scale and check that the scale reads 1.000 kg.
4. You have completed the Decreasing Load Test.
Return to Zero Test
This test ensures that, after all other tests have been completed successfully, the scanner/scale returns to zero. Without any weight on the weigh platter, verify that the scale reads 0.000 kg.
You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing in kilograms.
If the scanner/scale passes all these tests,
1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and install a seal (if required).
2. Reinstall the weigh platter.
If the scanner/scale fails any of these tests, it should be serviced by a qualified technician.
5-14
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Chapter 6
Programming
Introduction to Label Programming
The programming bar code labels contained in this manual will allow you to customize and configure features and settings for your scanner (scanner/scale). To ensure full compatibility and proper function, use only the programming bar codes in this manual and other product-specific publications to program scanner features.
This manual has been developed to make it quick and easy for users of all levels to find the information needed to understand and configure features. The following descriptions will help you to determine where to go from here.
Understanding the Basics
If you have little or no prior experience with programming using bar code labels, you should review the first few pages of this chapter to familiarize yourself with the basics of scanner programming before performing any changes to your configuration.
6-1
Product Reference Guide
Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System
Your scanner MUST be equipped with the correct hardware (interface board, cable, etc.) to properly communicate with your host system. Contact your dealer for information if you have questions about your scanner’s hardware compatibility.
You may also want to contact the dealer or your system administrator if you have no record of how your scanner was pre-programmed at the factory. Scanners are typically programmed with the default settings for specific interface types (see
, for more information); however, your scanner may have been custom configured with settings that are unique to your company or application.
Once you know the scanner’s current settings, you can determine what changes will be required to allow communication with your host system and/or optional features you choose to modify to customize your installation. After recording the modifications needed, finish reading this chapter, then turn to the appropriate page and follow the instructions to program the scanner.
When all scanner features are programmed to your satisfaction, the scanner is ready to be placed into operation.
Customizing Your Scanner’s Operation
Most scanner programming falls within three general categories:
•
— are features common to all interface types. Examples include beeper adjustments such as volume and length, read verification settings, etc.
•
— control the settings for interfacing with the
[optional] EAS device.
6-2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Integrating the Scanner With Your Host Sys-
CAUTION
•
— are the mandatory settings necessary to allow communication with your host terminal. Examples of these settings are: RS-232 baud rate and parity.
It is possible, via programming bar codes, to change the interface type (for example: from RS-232 to IBM Port 17). Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.
NOTE
Ensure that your planned modifications are compatible with the current interface. For example, baud rate selections are only valid in the RS-232 interface. The scanner will sound an error tone when scanning programming labels for features invalid to the current interface group.
•
— gives the scanner the capability to autodiscriminate as few as one, and as many as all available symbologies. For optimal scanner performance enable only those symbologies required. Additionally the scanner may be programmed with the standard options available for the various symbologies, such as check digit, minimum label length, fixed and variable length bar codes, etc.
If you experience difficulties, have questions or require additional information, contact your local distributor, or call your dealer or sales representative.
Product Reference Guide
6-3
Programming Overview
The scanner’s programmable feature settings can be modified to accommodate your system’s unique requirements. These settings can be communicated to the scanner in one of three ways:
1. Commands can be sent directly from the host. A limited set of host commands are available. Refer to
for more details or contact Tech Support.
2. Programming bar code labels can also be used to modify the scanner’s programmable settings. This manual provides the bar code labels and instructions necessary to configure the scanner’s features and options.
When you program the scanner using any of the methods above, the scanner will store the changes until reprogrammed or returned to factory defaults.
NOTE
Programming via Handheld Device
The scanner can also accept programming via its auxilliary port using a handheld scanning device. Eligible handheld devices must have the ability to transmit Code 128 function codes such as the programming bar codes presented in this manual. Datalogic models QuickScan
Scan
®
®
1000 and Quick-
6000 support this functionality. Handheld data format requirements (baud rate, parity, etc.) are presented in
Additionally the programmable feature,
to “External Handheld Input” to allow operation.
6-4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Programming Overview
What Is Programming Mode?
Programming Mode is a state in which the scanner must be placed in order to accept commands via programming bar code labels. When programming using the bar code labels in this manual, the scanner is typically placed in Programming Mode by scanning the SWITCH label.
While in the Programming Mode, the scanner only recognizes ONLY the special programming bar codes contained in this programming guide. See
for information about scanner indications while in Program-
ming Mode.
Entering and Exiting Programming Mode.
Use the bar code label below to enter and exit (‘switch” into and out of )
Programming Mode.
SWITCH LABEL
Product Reference Guide
6-5
Programming Session
NOTE
A typical programming session is conducted as follows:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code to place the scanner in Programming
Mode. Depending upon its current programming, the scanner may emit a beep or beeps, indicating it has read the bar code and the scanner (top) green LED will flash on and off slowly while the scanner remains in Programming Mode. Normal scanning functions are disabled.
2. Scan the programming bar code(s) that is (are) specially encoded to make the desired changes. With few exceptions
1
, the scanner will emit a triple beep each time you scan a valid programming bar code.
Not all features are available for all interfaces and the scanner will sound an error tone when scanning programming bar codes for features invalid to the current interface. Only features supported by the currently active interface will be implemented.
NOTE
If a bar code is scanned that changes the scanner’s interface, all previous configuration items scanned in the programming session are lost.
Additionally, when programming a feature requiring you to scan single digits to set a multi-digit number, such as Minimum Label Length, scanning the SWITCH bar code (or any item tag/item value bar code) before completing all input will result in an error tone and cause the scanner to exit Programming Mode. Under these circumstances, the current feature you were trying to set is thrown out; any previous bar codes scanned during the session will take effect.
6-6
1. Some features, such as Minimum Label Length, require you to select the label’s length by scanning a series of single-digit bar codes. A single ‘good read’ beep is sounded when scanning these single digits in Programming Mode. Only the final required digit in the sequence will produce a triple beep when scanned, indicating a successfully programmed feature.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Programming Overview
NOTE
It is recommended that programming sessions be limited to one feature at a time. Should you make a mistake in the programming sequence, it can be difficult to discover where an error has been made if several features are programmed at once. Additionally, it can be confusing to determine which features may or may not have been successfully set following such a session.
3. Scan the SWITCH bar code to save any new settings and exit Programming Mode. The scanner will sound a beep and reset upon exiting Programming Mode, and the green LED will return to its usual state (on steady or off ).
The scanner will exit Programming Mode under the following conditions:
— the programming sequence has been completed or the
SWITCH bar code is scanned
— five minutes have passed without scanning activity. Any data programmed during the current session will be ignored
1
, and the scanner will reset and revert to its condition previous to initiating the exited session.
— power is disconnected. Disconnecting power during Programming Mode, before scanning the SWITCH bar code, will cause all new settings to be ignored. On power-up, the scanner will return to previous settings.
4. Maintain a good record of all changes made to ensure that you know if the original factory settings have been changed.
Product Reference Guide
1. Exception: If an interface bar code had been read while in Programming Mode, the scanner will operate on the default settings for the new interface.
6-7
6-8
NOTE
Programming Sequence
To modify a scanner feature (item), the programming bar codes contained in this manual must be scanned in a given sequence depending upon the feature being programmed (as shown in
). There are three possible programming sequences:
If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to the factory default for that interface type.)
A. Programming sample A (the most commonly used format) demonstrates how three bar codes are scanned in sequence to do the following:
1. Place the scanner in Programming Mode (SWITCH bar code).
2. Scan the Item Tag
1
that will enable the new feature.
3. End the programming session and reset the scanner
(SWITCH bar code).
B. Sample B provides an example of a programming feature requiring the entry of a range value. Like sample A, the scanner is placed in Programming Mode and an Item Tag
a value must be entered before ending the programming session.
In the example, three digits must be scanned from the number pad
. This type of format, requiring several bar codes, is necessary to allow flexible programming for item values with larger numeric ranges.
C. The programming sequence shown in example C requires scanning of a single, extended length bar code. This special programming bar code contains all the data necessary to enter
Programming Mode, set the Item Tag
Programming Mode (all in one step).
1. An “Item Tag” is a term used to describe an assigned number, which is encoded in a programming bar code, that toggles (selects, enables, disables, etc.) a specific programming feature.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Programming Overview
Table 6-1. Programming Sequence
SET ITEM TAG ITEM VALUE END/RESET
A
1
SWITCH
2
ENABLE
NEW FEATURE
3
SWITCH
B
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
SWITCH
ENABLE NEW
FEATURE
USING THE
FOLLOWING
SETTINGS...
0
SWITCH
8
C
1
ONE BAR CODE CONTAINS SWITCH + ITEM TAG + ITEM VALUE + SWITCH
Product Reference Guide
6-9
LED and Beeper Indicators
The scanner provides a set of indicators that verify/announce the various scanner functions.
If You Make a Mistake...
If, during a programming session, you find that you are unsure of the scanner’s settings or wish to reset the scanner’s configuration, use the
Return to Factory Settings label below to return the scanner’s configuration to the factory settings. Scanning this label will also reset any changes made during previous programming sessions.
Return to Factory Settings
Scan this bar code to return the scanner to the default settings configured at the factory for the currently active interface. This bar code is typically used to return the scanner to a “known” operating state when the present programming status is not known, faulty, or suspect.
CAUTION
Use this bar code with caution, since it will reset ALL features that may have been programmed since the scanner’s installation.
NOTE
DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning this bar code, as the bar code below automatically enters and exits Programming Mode as a part of its function. If this bar code is scanned following a SWITCH bar code, it will simply cause the scanner to exit Programming Mode without making changes.
6-10
RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
If You Make a Mistake...
Test Mode
NOTE
Use this feature to place the scanner into a testing, or “demo” mode. This special mode disables the scanner interface, meaning that bar code data is not sent out to the host via the scanner interface. This allows the bar code to be scanned continuously without requiring a response from the POS terminal.
To return the scanner to normal function, scan the
DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning the bar codes on this page.
bar code sets the Double
Read Timeout to 600ms.
TEST MODE = DISABLE
TEST MODE = ENABLE
Product Reference Guide
6-11
General Scanner Features
Scanner Button Options
Allows configuration of the scanner (volume) button to different modes of operation.
• Disable Scanner Button — Disables all button functions
• Enable Standard Functions — Enables volume, tone, and reset.
• Enable Reset Only — The button’s sole function will be to reset the scanner.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-12
SCANNER BUTTON OPTIONS = DISABLE SCANNER BUTTON
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
General Scanner Features
Scanner Button Options — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
SCANNER BUTTON OPTIONS = ENABLE STANDARD FUNCTIONS
Product Reference Guide
SCANNER BUTTON OPTIONS = ENABLE RESET ONLY
6-13
Double Read Timeout
The Double Read Timeout feature sets a time limit that determines how much time must pass before reading the same label again (e.g. two identical items in succession).
To set the Double Read Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
If the incidence of multiple reads is not acceptable, increase the Double Read Timeout setting to a higher value.
NOTE
DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 400ms
6-14
DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 600ms
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
General Scanner Features
Double Read Timeout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 800ms
Product Reference Guide
DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 1 SECOND
6-15
Laser Timeout
The laser timeout feature sets the time for switching the visible laser diodes (VLDs) off if the scanner is idle. Using this feature can prolong the life of the VLDs.
To set the Laser Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-16
LASER TIMEOUT = 5 MINUTES
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
General Scanner Features
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
LASER TIMEOUT = 10 MINUTES
Product Reference Guide
LASER TIMEOUT = 15 MINUTES
6-17
Motor Timeout
The Motor Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the motor off when the scanner is not in use.
Laser safety requires that the laser switch off before the motor.
If you set the motor timeout shorter than the laser timeout, the motor and the laser will both shut off when the motor timeout expires.
NOTE
To set the Motor Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-18
MOTOR TIMEOUT = 5 MINUTES
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
General Scanner Features
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
MOTOR TIMEOUT = 10 MINUTES
Product Reference Guide
MOTOR TIMEOUT = 15 MINUTES
6-19
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
MOTOR TIMEOUT = 30 MINUTES
6-20
MOTOR TIMEOUT = 60 MINUTES
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
General Scanner Features
Label Gone Timeout
Specifies the amount of time that data segments are stored by the software before being discarded if a label has not been successfully decoded during the current “label in volume session,” which is defined as the time between when the label gone time is first started until the label gone timer expires.
To set the Label Gone Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 50 mS
6-21
Label Gone Timeout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 160 mS
6-22
LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 250 mS
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
General Scanner Features
Label Gone Timeout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 500 mS
Product Reference Guide
LABEL GONE TIMEOUT = 1 Second
6-23
Auxiliary Port Mode
Selects the usage for the scanner’s optional auxilliary port. The choices listed below are mutually exclusive (only one option can be active at a time).
• Disabled — Port is inactive
• External Handheld Input — Supports Datalogic
®
handheld scanners (QuickScan 1000, QuickScan 6000, PowerScan) as well as other models such as the Symbol
®
HotShot. Call your dealer for more information about supported devices.
Cable pinout information for the Auxiliary Port is provided in
of this manual. A connected handheld scanner
must be configured to transmit data as outlined in
.
NOTE
• PIR/CT — PIR (Productivity Index Reporting) is a value-added feature which allows the scanner to provide information to an external computer indicating how easy the label was to read. CT
(Checker Training) is also a value-added feature which allows the scanner to provide feedback to the cashier on how to scan in a more ergonomic fashion
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-24
AUXILIARY PORT MODE = DISABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
General Scanner Features
Auxiliary Port Mode — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
AUXILIARY PORT MODE = EXTERNAL HANDHELD INPUT
Product Reference Guide
AUXILIARY PORT MODE = PIR/CT
6-25
Auxiliary Port Baud Rate
Specifies the baud rate of the auxillary port when operating in PIR/CT mode.
PIR/CT is a value-added feature which may not have been activated on your model.
NOTE
To specify the Auxiliary Port Baud Rate:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the immediately following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
AUXILIARY PORT BAUD RATE = 1200
6-26
AUXILIARY PORT BAUD RATE = 2400
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
General Scanner Features
Auxiliary Port Baud Rate — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 4800
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 9600
6-27
Auxiliary Port Baud Rate — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 19200
6-28
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 38400
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
General Scanner Features
Auxiliary Port Baud Rate — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 57600
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 115200
6-29
Laser Failure Mode
This configuration item selects whether the scanner should continue operating if only one laser is functional. (The scanner has two lasers: One for the horizontal window, and one for the vertical window.) Options for this feature are:
• Single Laser Failure OK — The scanner can still operate even if one laser is no longer functional. In this mode the scanner will read only from the window associated with the operational laser. This provides the user the ability to continue working until the unit is serviced.
The 7-segment display will show the error code for the failed laser
), but the scanner will continue to function.
• Single Laser Failure Fatal — If it is desirable to have maximum performance or nothing at all, Laser Failure Mode should be selected as fatal. Upon single laser failure, the scanner will sound an error tone and cease scanning functions until serviced.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
LASER FAILURE MODE = SINGLE LASER FAILURE OK
6-30
LASER FAILURE MODE = SINGLE LASER FAILURE FATAL
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
General Scanner Features
Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)/Cashier Training (CT)
When PIR/CT is enabled, label quality data is appended to decoded data before being presented to the POS. The PIR feature allows the scanner to provide information to an external computer indicating how easy the label was to read. CT allows the scanner to provide feedback to the cashier on how to scan in a more ergonomic fashion.
NOTE
This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced capability.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
PIR/CT = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
PIR/CT = ENABLE
6-31
Indication Features
Green LED Idle State
This feature specifies the state of the green scanner LED when the scanner is idle and ready to read a label. Options are:
• Off
• On dim
To set the LED Idle State:
1. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
2. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
GREEN LED IDLE STATE = OFF
6-32
GREEN LED IDLE STATE = ON DIM
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Indication Features
Power-up Beep Control
Specifies the type of audible indication that is made when entering scanner-active mode on power-up. Choices are:
• No beep
• One beep
• Three beeps
To set the Power-up Beep:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
POWER-UP BEEP = OFF
Product Reference Guide
POWER-UP BEEP = ONE BEEP
6-33
Good Read Beep Control
This feature enables/disables scanner beep upon successfully decoding of a label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
GOOD READ BEEP = DISABLE
6-34
GOOD READ BEEP = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Indication Features
Good Read Beep Frequency
Adjusts the scanner’s good read beep to sound at low, medium, or high frequency (controls the beeper’s pitch/tone).
• Low = 660 Hz
• Medium = 860 Hz
• High = 1050 Hz
To set the Good Read Beep Frequency:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = LOW
6-35
Good Read Beep Frequency — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = MEDIUM
6-36
GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = HIGH
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Indication Features
Good Read Beep Length
Specifies the duration of a good read beep.
To set the good read beep length:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired good read beep length setting. The selectable range is 1-255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments.
Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-255).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned
Product Reference Guide
SET GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH
6-37
Good Read Beep Volume
Selects the beeper volume upon a good read beep. There are five selectable volumes, with each volume increment adding approximately five decibels to the previous level:
• 0 = Lowest Volume
• 1 = Medium-Low Volume
• 2 = Medium Volume
• 3 = Highest Volume
To set the Good Read Beep Volume:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selected volume bar code from this or the following pages.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-38
GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = LOWEST
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Indication Features
Good Read Beep Volume — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM LOW
Product Reference Guide
GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM
6-39
Good Read Beep Volume — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = HIGHEST
6-40
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Indication Features
Good Read When to Indicate
This feature specifies when the scanner will provide indication (beep and/ or flash its green LED) upon successfully reading a bar code.
• Good Read = Indicate after decode
• Good Read = Indicate after transmit
• Good Read = Indicate after CTS goes inactive, then active
The “Indicate after CTS goes inactive...” mode applies to RS-
232 STD and RS-232 WN interfaces only. If set to this mode in other interfaces, “Indicate after decode” mode will be implemented.
NOTE
To set the Good Read When to Indicate feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired mode bar code from this page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER DECODE
6-41
Good Read When to Indicate — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER TRANSMIT
6-42
GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER CTS GOES INACTIVE, THEN ACTIVE
(RS-232 ONLY)
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Scale Features
Scale Features
Scale Enable
NOTE
Use this feature to enable or disable scale operation.
Recalibration/recertification may be required when adding scale functionality. Consult your local Weights and Measures authority.
If this feature is enabled the scanner will expect that it is to function as a scanner-scale, and will indicate an error if it is not a scale-equipped unit. See
, for more information.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
SCALE = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
6-43
SCALE = ENABLE
Scale Enforced Zero Return
This feature enables/disables the enforced zero return of the scale. Three settings are available for this feature:
• Disable
• Scale Must Return to Zero Weight Within Two Minutes — Scale will require re-zeroing if a non-zero weight is left on for more than two minutes or if the scale is below zero.
• Scale Must Return to Zero Weight Between Weight Requests — Rezeroing is required if weight doesn't return to zero between weight requests from the POS, plus scale will require re-zeroing if a nonzero weight is left on for more than two minutes or if the scale is below zero.
• Non-Zero for Two Minutes — Re-zeroing is required if weight does not return to zero within two minutes.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. The strategy is to select the lowest possible filter level needed that allows normal scale operation.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-44
SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = DISABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Scale Features
Scale Enforced Zero Return — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN =
NON-ZERO FOR 2 MINUTES OR BELOW ZERO
SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = NON-ZERO FOR 2 MINUTES OR
BELOW ZERO OR NO ZERO BETWEEN WEIGHTS
Product Reference Guide
6-45
Scale Enforced Zero Return — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN =
NON-ZERO FOR 2 MINUTES
6-46
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Scale Features
Scale Interface Type
Use this feature to select the scale interface type. Choices are:
• No Scale Interface
• RS-232 — SASI
• RS-232 — ICL
To set the Scale Interface Type:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = NO SCALE INTERFACE
Product Reference Guide
SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 — SASI
6-47
Scale Interface Type — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 — ICL
6-48
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Scale Features
Scale Calibration Notification
When enabled, this feature allows the host to be notified of a calibration event.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
SCALE CALIBRATION NOTIFICATION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
SCALE CALIBRATION NOTIFICATION = ENABLE
6-49
Scale Intercharacter Delay
Sets the delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next, in 10 millisecond increments.
To specify the intercharacter delay:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the delay in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
6-50
SCALE INTERCHARACTER DELAY
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Scale Features
Remote Display — Enable/Disable
The scanner-scale can be configured to operate with or without a Remote
Display.
Recalibration/recertification may be required when adding a
Remote Display. Consult your local Weights and Measures authority.
NOTE
If this feature is enabled the scanner-scale will expect that it is connected to a Remote Display, and will indicate an error if one
, for more information.
REMOTE DISPLAY = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
REMOTE DISPLAY = ENABLE
6-51
EAS Features
EAS Active State
Specifies the active state polarity of EAS (Electronic Article Survellance); the inactive state is its opposite polarity. EAS output goes active during the good read indication of a bar code, allowing the EAS device to deactivate a tag on the product.
To set the EAS Active State:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAS ACTIVE STATE = ACTIVE LOW
6-52
EAS ACTIVE STATE = ACTIVE HIGH
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAS Features
EAS Timeout
Specifies the amount of time that an EAS (Electronic Article Survellance) signal is held in its active state for a good read indication.
To set the EAS Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3.Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
represent the desired EAS Timeout duration. The selectable range is 0-255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-255).
Examples:
000 = EAS timeout disabled
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
NOTE
A setting of 0 (000) disables this feature.
4.Scan the SWITCH bar code to exit Programming Mode.
SET EAS TIMEOUT
Product Reference Guide
6-53
Interface Related Features
Interface Type
INTERFACE (I/F)
TYPE
RS-232 Standard
RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf
RS-232 Single Cable
OEM USB
IBM
Port 17
IBM
Port 5B
IBM
Port 9B
USB Keyboard
Specifies the current scanner interface. Selections are:
I/F I.D.
NUMBER a
05
12
20
45
04
08
23
35
INTERFACE (I/F)
TYPE
Keyboard Wedge A
Keyboard Wedge B
Keyboard Wedge C
Keyboard Wedge D
Keyboard Wedge E
Keyboard Wedge F
Keyboard Wedge G
Keyboard Wedge H
Keyboard Wedge I
Keyboard Wedge J
NOT USER-SELECTABLE
Null Interface
7-segment FRU display indicates 0 at startup (accompanied by trill beep for approx. 2 seconds) a. To access a scanner’s interface identification number, place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode
and view the 7-segment FRU display (reference
Chapter 2, Scanner Diagnostic Mode
, for more information).
I/F I.D.
NUMBER
25
26
27
28
29
2A
31
32
33
34
6-54
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Interface Related Features
NOTE
A new scanner may have been shipped from the factory with a
Null Interface (no interface type selected) to ensure system compatibility at installation. In this case, the correct Interface
Type programming bar code must be scanned first before the scanner can be used with a POS system.
NOTE
If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to the factory default for that interface type.)
CAUTION
To select the desired interface:
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
When an interface is selected, the scanner loads the factory configuration for that interface as the selection is made, erasing any and all custom configuration that may have previously been done.
NOTE
1. Disconnect current interface cable(s) if currently connected.
2. Scan the SWITCH bar code
3. Scan the bar code representing the appropriate interface located on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes adjacent to and on any facing pages to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Product Reference Guide
6-55
NOTE
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Once the correct interface has been set, it will be necessary to proceed to the appropriate pages in this manual that select parameters and options for that interface. For example, if RS-
232 is selected, turn to the pages in this manual headed as features specific to the RS-232 interface.
5. Connect new interface cable(s).
6-56
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
CAUTION
Interface Related Features
RS-232 Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
Product Reference Guide
INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 STANDARD
6-57
CAUTION
RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
6-58
INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 WINCOR-NIXDORF
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
CAUTION
Interface Related Features
RS-232 Single Cable Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
NOTE
Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port. The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.
Product Reference Guide
INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 SINGLE CABLE
6-59
CAUTION
OEM USB Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
NOTE
Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port. The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.
6-60
INTERFACE TYPE = OEM USB
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
CAUTION
Interface Related Features
IBM Port 17 Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
NOTE
Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port. The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.
Product Reference Guide
INTERFACE TYPE = IBM PORT 17
6-61
CAUTION
IBM Port 5B Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
6-62
INTERFACE TYPE = IBM PORT 5B
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
CAUTION
Interface Related Features
IBM Port 9B Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
Product Reference Guide
INTERFACE TYPE = IBM PORT 9B
6-63
CAUTION
USB Keyboard Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
6-64
INTERFACE TYPE = USB KEYBOARD
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
CAUTION
Interface Related Features
Keyboard Wedge A Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
Product Reference Guide
INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE A
6-65
CAUTION
Keyboard Wedge B Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
6-66
INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE B
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
CAUTION
Interface Related Features
Keyboard Wedge C Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
Product Reference Guide
INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE C
6-67
CAUTION
Keyboard Wedge D Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
6-68
INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE D
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
CAUTION
Interface Related Features
Keyboard Wedge E Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
Product Reference Guide
INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE E
6-69
CAUTION
Keyboard Wedge F Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
6-70
INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE F
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
CAUTION
Interface Related Features
Keyboard Wedge G Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
Product Reference Guide
INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE G
6-71
CAUTION
Keyboard Wedge H Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
6-72
INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE H
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
CAUTION
Interface Related Features
Keyboard Wedge I Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
Product Reference Guide
INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE I
6-73
CAUTION
Keyboard Wedge J Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface.
ALWAYS make interface selections with the host cable DIS-
CONNECTED.
6-74
INTERFACE TYPE = KEYBOARD WEDGE J
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
NOTE
Interface Related Features
Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length
Specifies the maximum number of data characters allowed in messages transmitted to the host.
To set the Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED MES-
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes
on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired maximum host-transmitted message length. The selectable range is 0-249 data characters. (Labels that are longer than this length are not read.) Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-249).
If this configuration item is set to 0 (000), there is no general length limit imposed on data being transmitted to the host.
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned
Product Reference Guide
SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED MESSAGE LENGTH
6-75
Number of Host Transmission Buffers
Specifies the number of host transmission(s) that may be buffered. By buffering data from a bar code, the scanner can continue to read a new bar code while the old one is being transmitted to the host. Selecting BUF-
FERS = 1 means that the first bar code must be transmitted before a new one can be read. A selection of BUFFERS = 2 means that a new bar code can be read while data from the first bar code is transmitted. When the
, is enabled, the scanner will beep when the data is placed in a transmission buffer.
When a DISABLE SCANNER command is received from the host, the scanner will continue to transmit all data that is buffered.
To select the Number of Host Transmission Buffers:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan bar code below representing the desired setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
NUMBER OF HOST TRANSMISSION BUFFERS = 1
6-76
NUMBER OF HOST TRANSMISSION BUFFERS = 2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
AIM ID
Interface Related Features
AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label identifiers) can be included with scanned bar code data. AIM label identifiers consist of three characters as follows:
• A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by...
• A code character (see the table below), followed by
• A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent)
SYMBOLOGY
CHA
R
SYMBOLOGY
UPC/EAN
Code 39
Codabar
E
A
F
Interleaved.2 of 5
Code 93
I
G
Code 128/EAN 128
C a. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)
MSI/Plessey
PDF 417
DataBar Omnidirectional, DataBar
Expanded (RSS)
Standard 2 of 5
ISBN
CHA
R
M
L e
S
X a
Figure 6-1. AIM ID
Prefix Label ID AIM ID
SCANNER
Bar Code Data Label ID
Product Reference Guide
6-77
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
AIM ID: DISABLE
6-78
AIM ID: ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Interface Related Features
Label ID Control
A Label ID is used to identify a barcode (symbology) type. See Appendix
D, Default Settings, for a listing for common symbologies. It can be appended previous to or following the transmitted barcode data depending upon how this option is enabled. This feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs individually per symbology. If you wish to program the scanner to always include an industry standard label identifier for ALL symbology types, see the previous feature, AIM ID.
The Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (each of which are 00-FF) followed by a control character (00-01), This control character, when set to zero, does nothing. When set to one, it appends the symbology’s AIM ID to the Label ID.
When the control character is set to 01 for UPC-A and UPC-E, it expands the label to EAN-13 and thus follows the EAN-13 Label
ID settings.
NOTE
Label IDs cannot be modified when using the OEM-USB interface.
To configure a Label ID:
1. Scan the START barcode.
2. Select Label ID position as either BEFORE or AFTER by scanning the appropriate barcode.
3. Determine the desired character(s) (you may choose up to three) which will represent the Label ID for the selected symbology. Next, turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent hex digits associated with your choice of Label
ID. For example, the default Label ID for Code 39 for the Single
Cable RS-232 interface is ‘B’ ‘1’. To change it to ‘R’ ‘4’, the following should be performed:
• Scan the Switch label
• Scan the ‘Set Code 39 Label ID’ label
• Scan ‘5’
• Scan ‘2’
• Scan ‘3’
Product Reference Guide
6-79
• Scan 4’
• Scan ‘0’
• Scan ‘0’
• Scan ‘0’
• Scan ‘0’
• Scan the Switch label
Figure 6-2. Label ID Position Options
SCANNER
Prefix Label ID Aim ID
OR
Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
LABEL ID TRANSMISSION: DISABLE
6-80
LABEL ID TRANSMISSION: BEFORE BAR CODE DATA
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Interface Related Features
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
LABEL ID TRANSMISSION: AFTER BAR CODE DATA
Product Reference Guide
6-81
Global Prefix
This feature specifies the prefix that is added to beginning of label transmission.
To specify the Global Prefix Character(s):
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in
that represent the hex designation for the desired character(s). A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
Up to 20 hex pairs can be designated.
To specify “no Global Prefix,” scan 00.
NOTE
4. If designating the full 20 hex pairs, the scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned. If designating less than 20 hex pairs, you can
end the programming sequence early by scanning the
bar code.
5. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-82
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Interface Related Features
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
SET GLOBAL PREFIX
Product Reference Guide
TERMINATE SEQUENCE
6-83
Global Suffix
This feature specifies the suffix that is added to end of a label transmission. Three standard options are available below. Contact your dealer for other alternate settings for this feature.
• No Global Suffix
• CR — Carriage Return
• CR LF — Carriage Return, Line Feed
To set the Global Suffix:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-84
GLOBAL SUFFIX = NO GLOBAL SUFFIX
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Interface Related Features
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
GLOBAL SUFFIX = CR
Product Reference Guide
GLOBAL SUFFIX = CR LF
6-85
Case Conversion
Changes the case of all alphabetic characters to upper or lower case.
Choices are:
• No case conversion
• Upper case
• Lower case
To configure this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the case conversion bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-86
CASE CONVERSION = NO CASE CONVERSION
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Interface Related Features
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
CASE CONVERSION = UPPER CASE
Product Reference Guide
CASE CONVERSION = LOWER CASE
6-87
IBM Features
IBM Interface Options
IBM interfaces offer specific control over interaction with certain devices.
The OEM USB interface provides its own set of options. Refer to the feature,
NOTE
Options for this feature are as follows:
• FULL host interface support — Accepts scanner and scale configuration host commands.
• Ignore host interface configuration of scanner and scale — Ignores all scanner and scale configuration host commands.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
IBM INTERFACE OPTION = FULL HOST INTERFACE SUPPORT
6-88
IBM INTERFACE OPTION = IGNORE HOST I/F CONFIG OF SCANNER &
SCALE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
IBM Features
IBM Number of Host Resets
Specifies how many consecutive resets are processed before the scanner starts a five-second period during which a user is allowed to enter labelprogramming mode and configure the scanner.
To set the number of host resets:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired number of host resets. The selectable range is 1-15 resets. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-015).
Examples:
001 = 1 reset
005 = 5 resets
011= 11 resets
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned
Product Reference Guide
SET IBM NUMBER OF HOST RESETS
6-89
IBM Scale Address
This feature applies to IBM Port 17 ONLY.
NOTE
Specifies IBM scale address for IBM Port 17. The following three addresses are available:
• 6A
• 6B
• 6E
To set the IBM Scale Address:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page that represents the desired scale address designation.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-90
IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6A
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
IBM Features
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6B
Product Reference Guide
IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6E
6-91
IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format
This feature enables/disables scanner's ability to set a symbology identifier for a specified label to Code 39 before transmitting that label data to an
IBM host. This applies to: Code 128, Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port
5B; Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port 9B.
When enabled, this feature has no effect on IBM Port 17.
NOTE
To enable/disable the IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT = DISABLE
6-92
IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
IBM Features
IBM Label Slicing Control
Enables/disables the slicing of IBM-46XX host transmission data into multiple pieces when a label is longer than the length specified by
Options are:
• Disable Label Slicing — Send data to host in one piece.
• Enable Label Slicing — Slice the host data into multiple pieces when necessary.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
IBM LABEL SLICING CONTROL = DISABLE LABEL SLICING
Product Reference Guide
IBM LABEL SLICING CONTROL = ENABLE LABEL SLICING
6-93
IBM Maximum Label Slice Length
Specifies the maximum allowable length of host transmit data in each sliced frame.
This setting only applies when
enabled.
NOTE
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below,
. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired slice length. The selectable range is a length from
14 to 246. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (014-100).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
6-94
SET IBM MAXIMUM LABEL SLICE LENGTH
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
IBM Features
OEM USB Scanner Device Type
The OEM USB protocol allows for the scanner to be identified as one of two different types of barcode scanners. Depending on what other scanners you may already have connected to a USB POS, you may need to change this setting to enable all scanners to communicate. Options are:
• Table Top Scanner
• Handheld Scanner
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
OEM USB SCANNER DEVICE TYPE = TABLE TOP SCANNER
Product Reference Guide
OEM USB SCANNER DEVICE TYPE = HANDHELD SCANNER
6-95
RS-232 Features
RS-232 Baud Rate
This feature selects the baud rate required for sending and receiving data.
Single cable interfaces are limited to Baud Rate selections up to 19200. They cannot communicate at Baud Rates of 38400 and up.
NOTE
To specify the RS-232 Baud Rate:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the immediately following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 1200
6-96
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 2400
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 4800
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 9600
6-97
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 19200
6-98
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 38400
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 57600
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 BAUD RATE = 115200
6-99
RS-232 Number of Data Bits
Specifies number of data bits required for sending and receiving data.
8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configuration.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Data Bit setting.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 NUMBER OF DATA BITS = 7
6-100
RS-232 NUMBER OF DATA BITS = 8
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 Number of Stop Bits
Specifies number of stop bits required for sending and receiving data.
8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configuration.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Stop Bit setting.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 NUMBER OF STOP BITS = 1
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 NUMBER OF STOP BITS = 2
6-101
RS-232 Parity
Specifies parity required for sending and receiving data.
8 data bits with 2 stop bits and parity enabled is not a valid configuration.
NOTE
Options for this setting are:
•
•
•
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or on the following pages representing the desired Parity setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-102
RS-232 PARITY = NONE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 PARITY = EVEN
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 PARITY = ODD
6-103
RS-232 Hardware Control
Enables/disables use of the RS-232 CTS signal for flow control and/or scan control.
Options are:
• Disable — The scanner transmits to the host regardless of any activity on the CTS line.
• Enable CTS Flow Control — The CTS signal controls transmission of data to the host.
• Enable CTS Scan Control — The CTS line must be active for scanner to read and transmit data. While the CTS line is inactive, scanner remains in a host- disabled state; following a successful label transmission, the CTS signal must transition to inactive and then to active to enable scanning for the next label.
• Enable Magellan SL CTS scan control — Emulates default Magellan SL setting for this feature.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan bar code below or from the following page for the desired setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-104
RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = DISABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 Hardware Control — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE CTS FLOW CONTROL
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE CTS SCAN CONTROL
6-105
RS-232 Hardware Control — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE MGL SL CTS SCAN CONTROL
6-106
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 Intercharacter Delay
Specifies delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next in 10-millisecond increments.
To set the RS-232 Intercharacter Delay:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below,
. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the delay in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
Product Reference Guide
SET RS-232 INTERCHARACTER DELAY
6-107
RS-232 Software Flow Control
Enables/disables RS-232 Flow Control using XON/ XOFF characters. .
This item will be ignored when the feature,
, is enabled
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL = DISABLE
6-108
RS-232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 Host Echo
When enabled, this feature passes all data through the scanner to the host as it comes in. This feature is used for applications where “daisy chaining” of RS-232 devices onto the same cable is necessary. If, for example, one of the devices in the chain is a terminal where someone is entering data while another person is simultaneously scanning a bar code requiring transmission to the host, the scanner will wait for the RS-232 channel to be quiet for a specified period of time (set via
RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval
).
The scanner can be set to observe this delay before sending its data in order to avoid RS-232 transmission conflicts.
When RS-232 Host Echo is enabled, the following features are ignored:
as well as all other ACK/ NAK related operations, plus processing of RS-232 host commands.
NOTE
To enable/disable this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 HOST ECHO = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 HOST ECHO = ENABLE
6-109
RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval
This setting specifies the time interval of RS-232 channel inactivity which must transpire before the scanner will break the host echo loop to transmit the bar code data that has just been scanned to the host.
• 0 - 100 = Time in 10-millisecond increments.
To set the Host Echo Quiet Interval:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below,
. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired timeout. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-
100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
6-110
SET RS-232 HOST ECHO QUIET INTERVAL
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 Ignore Host Commands
When set to ignore host commands, the scanner will ignore all host commands except for the minimum set necessary to keep the interface active, transmit labels, and transmit scale information. For normal operation of the interface, disable this feature.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS =
NORMAL (DO NOT IGNORE HOST COMMANDS)
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS = ENABLE
6-111
RS-232 TTL
Specifies whether RS-232 interface provides TTL levels on the output pins TxD and RTS.
Choices are:
• Normal RS-232 levels
• TTL levels
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 LEVELS = NORMAL RS-232
6-112
RS-232 LEVELS = TTL
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 TTL Invert
Enables/disables inversion of TTL.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 TTL INVERT = NO INVERT
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 TTL INVERT = INVERT
6-113
RS-232 ICL DC1 Character Delay Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to delay a DC1 response for 40 milliseconds.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 ICL DC1 CHARACTER DELAY = DISABLE
6-114
RS-232 ICL DC1 CHARACTER DELAY = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 Team POS ICL Scale
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to enter TEAM POS ICL Scale mode.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 TEAM POS ICL SCALE MODE = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 TEAM POS ICL SCALE MODE = ENABLE
6-115
RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL
Enables/disables ability of scanner to beep (sound a good read tone) on receiving an ASCII BEL (07 hex).
• Disable
• Enable
To enable/disable this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 BEEP ON ASCII BEL = DISABLE
6-116
RS-232 BEEP ON ASCII BEL = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 Beep After Weigh
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to beep after weight data is transmitted to the host. Scale interfaces that support this item are: RS-232
ICL, RS-232 SASI, and RS-232 Single Cable.
To enable/disable the Beep After Weigh feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
BEEP AFTER WEIGH = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
BEEP AFTER WEIGH = ENABLE
6-117
RS-232 Beep on Not on File
Select for the host to beep (or not) when a not-on-file condition is detected by the host. This feature is also applicable to single cable RS-232.
RS-232 BEEP ON NOT ON FILE = DISABLE
6-118
RS-232 BEEP ON NOT ON FILE = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 ACK NAK Enable
This enables/disables the ability of the scanner to support the RS-232
ACK/NAK protocol. When configured, the scanner and/or host sends an
“ACK” when it receives data properly, and sends “NAK” when the data is in error. Selections for this option are:
• Disable
• Label Transmission — the scanner expects an ACK/NAK response from the host when a label is sent)
• Host Acknowledgement — Enabled for Host Commands (the scanner will respond with ACK/NAK when the host sends a command)
• Label & Host — Enabled for both Label Transmission & Host
Commands
To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Enable:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired option from bar codes below and on the following page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 ACK NAK = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 ACK/NAK = LABEL TRANSMISSION
6-119
RS-232 ACK NAK Enable — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 ACK/NAK = HOST ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
6-120
RS-232 ACK/NAK = LABEL & HOST
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 ACK Character
NOTE
This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as an ACK character.
DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recog-
data bits.
To specify the RS-232 ACK Character:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the hex designation for the desired character. A table contain-
and their corresponding Hex Values is
available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for the desired character. For example, if ASCII “A” were the desired ACK character, you would scan the digits “4”, then “1” (the ASCII corresponding hex value).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned.
Product Reference Guide
SET RS-232 ACK CHARACTER
6-121
RS-232 NAK Character
NOTE
This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as a NAK character.
DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the feature,
data bits.
To specify the RS-232 NAK Character:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the hex designation for the desired character. A table contain-
and their corresponding Hex Values is
available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for the desired character. For example, if ASCII “A” were the desired NAK character, you would scan the digits “4”, then “1” (the ASCII corresponding hex value).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned.
6-122
SET RS-232 NAK CHARACTER
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout
This option specifies the action scanner performs on expiration of the
.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RS-232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT = ENABLE
6-123
RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value
This item specifies the time the scanner will wait for an ACK character from the host following a label transmission.
• 0 = Infinite timeout
• 1 - 75 = Timeout in 200-millisecond increments
To set the ACK NAK Timeout Value:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below,
. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired timeout. A setting of 0 specifies an infinite timeout. The remaining selectable range is 1-75, which is the timeout in
200-millisecond increments. Pad all single digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-075).
Examples:
000 = Infinite timeout
001 = 200ms
005 = 1,000ms (1 second)
040 = 8,000ms (8 seconds)
075 = 15,000ms (15 seconds)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
6-124
SET RS-232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count
This feature sets the number of times for the scanner to retry a label transmission under a retry condition.
To set the RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT
below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired number. The selectable range is 0-255 resets. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-255).
A setting of 255 specifies “retry forever.”
NOTE
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
Product Reference Guide
SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT
6-125
RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling
This item specifies the method the scanner will use to handle errors detected while waiting to receive the ACK character from the host. Errors include unrecognized host commands and communication errors such as parity or framing errors.
• Ignore Errors (recommended setting)
• Assume ACK (risk of lost label data)
• Assume NAK (risk of duplicate label)
To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired option from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-126
RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = IGNORE ERRORS
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Features
RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = ASSUME ACK
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = ASSUME NAK
6-127
RS-232 Indicate Transmission Failure
Enables/disables an audible error indication upon a transmission failure.
RS-232 INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE = DISABLE
6-128
RS-232 INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Single Cable RS-232 Options
Single Cable RS-232 Options
The RS-232 Single Cable interface shares some configuration options with other RS-232 interfaces. Rather than repeat them in this chapter as
Single Cable options, please find them referenced as follows:
•
•
RS-232 Number of Data Bits on page 100
•
RS-232 Number of Stop Bits on page 101
•
•
RS-232 Software Flow Control on page 108
•
RS-232 Beep After Weigh on page 117
•
RS-232 Beep on Not on File on page 118
Product Reference Guide
6-129
Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol
This sets the type of interface protocol that will be used in Single Cable
RS-232.
Options are:
• Scanner/scale RS-232 protocol
• Scanner only RS-232 protocol
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PROTOCOL = SCANNER/SCALE
6-130
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PROTOCOL = SCANNER ONLY
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Single Cable RS-232 Stale Weight Timeout
Single Cable RS-232 Options
Specifies the amount of time (in 10 msec increments) that scale data is presented to the host before being discarded.
To set the Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
STALE WEIGHT TIMEOUT = 200 msec
Product Reference Guide
STALE WEIGHT TIMEOUT = 230 msec
6-131
Single Cable RS-232 Stale Weight Timeout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
STALE WEIGHT TIMEOUT = 250 msec
6-132
STALE WEIGHT TIMEOUT = 330 msec
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Single Cable RS-232 Options
Single Cable RS-232 Scale — Transmit Weight Digits
Specifies whether the scale transmits weight data as five digits or as four digits.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
TRANSMIT WEIGHT DIGITS = FIVE DIGITS
Product Reference Guide
TRANSMIT WEIGHT DIGITS = FOUR DIGITS
6-133
Single Cable Manufacturer Extensions
Enables/Disables manufacturer
1
extensions to the Single Cable RS-232 interface. These extensions communicate scale calibration information to the host.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
SINGLE CABLE MANUFACTURER EXTENSIONS = DISABLE
6-134
SINGLE CABLE MANUFACTURER EXTENSIONS = ENABLE
1. The manufacturer of the scanner.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Single Cable RS-232 Options
Single Cable Pacesetter Plus Enable
Enables/disables the scanner’s ability to send Pacesetter Plus information as trailers to UPC/EAN label data.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
SINGLE CABLE PACESETTER PLUS = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
SINGLE CABLE PACESETTER PLUS = ENABLE
6-135
Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection
Specifies how RTS and CTS are used to control the data flow. RTS is controlled by the Scanner and can be continuously held high/low, or can be asserted during label transmission. The scanner looks at CTS, as the configuration values state, to determine when to send label data.
Choices are:
• Option 0 = RTS is held in low state and CTS is ignored
• Option 1 = RTS is held in high state and CTS is ignored
• Option 2 = Assert RTS and wait for CTS to be asserted
• Option 3 = Assert RTS and ignore CTS
• Option 4 = RTS held low, wait for CTS to be asserted
• Option 5 = RTS held high, wait for CTS to be asserted
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan a bar code below or on the following pages representing the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 0
6-136
RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 1
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Single Cable RS-232 Options
Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 2
Product Reference Guide
RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 3
6-137
Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 4
6-138
RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 5
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Single Cable RS-232 Options
Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use BCC.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE BCC = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE BCC = ENABLE
6-139
Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use ACK/NAK.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ACK/NAK = DISABLE
6-140
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ACK/NAK = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Single Cable RS-232 Options
Single Cable RS-232 Use STX
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use STX.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE STX = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE STX = ENABLE
6-141
Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character
This feature selects the STX character.
To specify the STX Character:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 STX CHARAC-
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in
that represent the decimal designation for the desired character. A
decimal values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning decimal digits for each character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-127). Thus, to set a single character value of A, bar codes containing the digits ‘0’, ‘6’ and ‘5’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any decimal value from 001 to 127.
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
6-142
SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 STX CHARACTER
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Single Cable RS-232 Options
Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character
Allows selection of the ETX character.
To specify the ETX Character:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 ETX CHARAC-
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in
that represent the decimal designation for the desired character. A
decimal values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning decimal digits for each character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-127). Thus, to set a single character value of A, bar codes containing the digits ‘0’, ‘6’ and ‘5’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any decimal value from 001 to 127.
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
Product Reference Guide
SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 ETX CHARACTER
6-143
Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features
Features listed in this section apply to both the Keyboard Wedge and USB
Keyboard interfaces unless otherwise noted.
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout
This feature specifies the country/language to be supported by the keyboard.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the appropriate country bar code from the following pages.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on that and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = USA
6-144
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = BELGIUM
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Product Reference Guide
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = DENMARK
6-145
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = FRANCE
6-146
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = GERMANY
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = ITALY
Product Reference Guide
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = NORWAY
6-147
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = PORTUGAL
6-148
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = SPAIN
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = SWEDEN
Product Reference Guide
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = SWITZERLAND
6-149
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = JAPANESE 106 KEY
6-150
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = HUNGARY
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = CZECH
Product Reference Guide
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = SLOVAKIA
6-151
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = ROMANIA
6-152
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = CROATIA
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
KEYBOARD LAYOUT = POLAND
Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval
Specifies amount of time to look for keyboard activity before scanner breaks keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host.
To set the Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below,
. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired delay. The selectable range is 1-100, which is the interval duration in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry
(001-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
Product Reference Guide
SET KEYBOARD INTERFACE QUIET INTERVAL
6-153
Keyboard Interface Caps Lock State
Specifies the format in which the scanner sends character data..
Choices are:
• CAPS LOCK OFF — send character data in normal format.
• CAPS LOCK ON — send character data in reverse case.
• SHIFT LOCK ON — send character data in shifted case. This option only applies to Wedge G. For other interface this setting results in a CAPS LOCK OFF functionality.
• CAPS LOCK COMPENSATION MODE — This only applies to the USB Keyboard Interface. For other interfaces, this setting results in a CAPS LOCK OFF functionality.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CAPS LOCK STATE = OFF
6-154
CAPS LOCK STATE = CAPS LOCK ON
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features
Keyboard Interface Caps Lock State — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
CAPS LOCK STATE = SHIFT LOCK ON
Product Reference Guide
CAPS LOCK STATE = CAPS LOCK COMPENSATION MODE
6-155
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Simulation
Enables/disables ability of scanner to perform host communications normally performed by attached keyboard.
This feature does not apply to the USB Keyboard interface.
NOTE
All PCs check the keyboard status during the power-on Selftest. It is recommended that you enable this function if you are working without a keyboard installation. It simulates keyboard timing and passes the keyboard status to the PC during power-on.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
KEYBOARD SIMULATION = DISABLE
6-156
KEYBOARD SIMULATION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features
Keyboard Interface — Control Characters
Specifies how the scanner transmits ASCII control characters to the host.
This feature does not apply to the USB Keyboard interface.
NOTE
Choices are:
• Disable Control Characters
• Enable transmission of control characters to host
• Send characters between 00H and 1FH according to a special function-key mapping table. (This is used to send keys that are not in the normal ASCII set; a unique set is provided for each available
Appendix E, Keyboard Function Key Mappings
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your choice from the Control Characters feature bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
CONTROL CHARACTERS = DISABLE
6-157
Keyboard Interface — Control Characters — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
CONTROL CHARACTERS = ENABLE TRANSMISSION OF CTL CHARAC-
TERS
6-158
CONTROL CHARACTERS = ENABLE FUNCTION KEY MAPPING
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features
Keyboard Interface — Intercharacter Delay
Sets the delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next, in 10 millisecond increments.
To specify the intercharacter delay:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the delay in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
Product Reference Guide
SET KEYBOARD WEDGE INTERCHARACTER DELAY
6-159
Symbology Programming
NOTE
If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that interface configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming session. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items — including symbology programming — to the factory default for that interface type.)
Coupon Control
Used to control the method of processing coupon labels.
Options are:
• Disable coupon decoding
• Enable UPC/EAN coupon decoding
• Enable RSS coupon decoding
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-160
COUPON CONTROL = DISABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Symbology Programming
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
COUPON CONTROL = ENABLE UPC/EAN COUPON DECODING
Product Reference Guide
COUPON CONTROL = ENABLE DATABAR COUPON DECODING
6-161
UPC-A Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-A labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC-A = DISABLE
6-162
UPC-A = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
UPC-A Enable
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A number system character.
This feature MUST be enabled for IBM interfaces for proper function.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC-A NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
UPC-A NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Product Reference Guide
6-163
UPC-A Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC-A CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
6-164
UPC-A CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
UPC-A Enable
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13
Enables/disables expansion of UPC-A labels to EAN/JAN-13.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EXPAND UPC-A TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
EXPAND UPC-A TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE
6-165
UPC-A Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-A label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-166
SET UPC-A LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
UPC-A Enable
UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether the
Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET UPC-A 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET UPC-A 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-167
UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET UPC-A 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-168
SET UPC-A 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
UPC-A Enable
UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-A 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET UPC-A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET UPC-A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-169
UPC-A Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a UPC-A label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC-A MINIMUM READS = 1
6-170
UPC-A MINIMUM READS = 2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
UPC-A Enable
UPC-A Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
UPC-A MINIMUM READS = 3
Product Reference Guide
UPC-A MINIMUM READS = 4
6-171
UPC-E Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-E labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC-E = DISABLE
6-172
UPC-E = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
UPC-E Enable
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E number system character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC-E NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
UPC-E NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Product Reference Guide
6-173
UPC-E Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC-E CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
6-174
UPC-E CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
UPC-E Enable
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A
Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to UPC-A.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EXPAND UPC-E TO UPC-A = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
EXPAND UPC-E TO UPC-A = ENABLE
6-175
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13
Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to EAN/JAN-13.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EXPAND UPC-E TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE
6-176
EXPAND UPC-E TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
UPC-E Enable
UPC-E Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-E label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET UPC-E LABEL ID
6-177
UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET UPC-E 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-178
SET UPC-E 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
UPC-E Enable
UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether
the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET UPC-E 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET UPC-E 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-179
UPC-E 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-E 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET UPC-E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-180
SET UPC-E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
UPC-E Enable
UPC-E Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a UPC-E label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC-E MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
UPC-E MINIMUM READS = 2
6-181
UPC-E Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
UPC-E MINIMUM READS = 3
6-182
UPC-E MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-13 Enable
EAN-13 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-13 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-13 = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
EAN-13 = ENABLE
6-183
EAN-13 First Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of EAN/JAN-13 first character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-13 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
6-184
EAN-13 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-13 Enable
EAN-13 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-13 check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-13 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
EAN-13 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-185
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable
Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN-13 labels starting with 978 to
Bookland ISBN labels.
NOTE
If any add-on information is present on the label prior to the conversion to ISBN, the add-on data will be discarded. Only the base label will be converted.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion= DISABLE
6-186
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-13 Enable
EAN 13 Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN 13 label ID to be added to bar code data.
To set this feature:
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET EAN 13 LABEL ID
6-187
EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether
the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET EAN-13 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-188
SET EAN-13 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-13 Enable
EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET EAN-13 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET EAN-13 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-189
EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-13 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether
the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
SET EAN-13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-190
SET EAN-13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID = DISABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-13 Enable
EAN-13 Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN-13 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-13 MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
EAN-13 MINIMUM READS = 2
6-191
EAN-13 Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
EAN-13 MINIMUM READS = 3
6-192
EAN-13 MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-13 Enable
Bookland Label ID
This feature specifies a Bookland label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID
6-193
EAN-8 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-8 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-8 = DISABLE
6-194
EAN-8 = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-8 Enable
EAN-8 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-8 check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
EAN-8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-195
Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13
Enables/disables expansion of EAN/JAN-8 labels to EAN/JAN-13.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EXPAND EAN/JAN-8 TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE
6-196
EXPAND EAN/JAN-8 TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-8 Enable
EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Insertion
Enables/Disables the ability of the scanner to insert a guard pattern into an otherwise complete EAN-8 segment it has received.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-8/JAN-8 GUARD INSERTION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
EAN-8/JAN-8 GUARD INSERTION = ENABLE
6-197
EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Substitution
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to substitute a guard pattern for even-parity 6 when an EAN-8/JAN-8 label is presented.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-8/JAN-8 GUARD SUBSTITUTION = DISABLE
6-198
EAN-8/JAN-8 GUARD SUBSTITUTION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-8 Enable
EAN-8/JAN-8 Both Guards Substitution
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to find an EAN/JAN8 guard pattern in cases where the EAN/JAN8 margin makes the guard look like a character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-8/JAN-8 BOTH GUARDS SUBSTITUTION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
EAN-8/JAN-8 BOTH GUARDS SUBSTITUTION = ENABLE
6-199
EAN-8 Stitch Exact Label Halves
When enabled, this allows the scanner the ability to stitch exact EAN-8 label haves with no overlapping characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-8 STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES = DISABLE
6-200
EAN-8 STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-8 Enable
EAN-8 Stitch Unlike Label Halves
When enabled, this allows the scanner the ability to stitch two EAN-8 label halves together that may contain differing characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-8 STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
EAN-8 STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES = ENABLE
6-201
EAN 8 Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN 8 label ID to be added to bar code data.
To set this feature:
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-202
SET EAN 8 LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-8 Enable
EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET EAN-8 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET EAN-8 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-203
EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET EAN-8 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-204
SET EAN-8 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-8 Enable
EAN-8 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-8 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET EAN-8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET EAN-8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-205
EAN-8 Decoding Levels
Decoding levels allow the decoder to be set to perform at one of four selectable levels:
• Very Conservative — Slower scan time, virtually eleminates misreads. The most secure setting.
• Slightly More Aggressive — Faster scanning, more aggressive, yet minimizes misreads.
• Moderately Aggressive — Even faster scanning, even more aggressive.
• Very Aggressive — Fastest scan speed, most aggressive.
CAUTION
Use caution when setting this feature, as the aggressive settings for this feature allow a higher potential for misreads.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
NOTE
It is important to note that the default for this feature is the
“Slightly More Aggressive” setting. For default settings for other features, see
6-206
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-8 Enable
EAN-8 Decoding Levels — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = VERY CONSERVATIVE
Product Reference Guide
EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = SLIGHTLY MORE AGGRESSIVE
6-207
EAN-8 Decoding Levels — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = MODERATELY AGGRESSIVE
6-208
EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = VERY AGGRESSIVE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-8 Enable
EAN-8 Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN-8 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-8 MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
EAN-8 MINIMUM READS = 2
6-209
EAN-8 Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
EAN-8 MINIMUM READS = 3
6-210
EAN-8 MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-8 Enable
EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length
Specifies the minimum number of characters necessary in an EAN-8/
JAN-8 label segment in order for the scanner to accept a label for decoding. Selectable from 5 to 15 characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 5 CHARACTERS
Product Reference Guide
EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 6 CHARACTERS
6-211
EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 7 CHARACTERS
6-212
EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 8 CHARACTERS
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length — continued
EAN-8 Enable
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 9 CHARACTERS
Product Reference Guide
EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 10 CHARACTERS
6-213
EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 11 CHARACTERS
6-214
EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 12 CHARACTERS
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length — continued
EAN-8 Enable
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 13 CHARACTERS
Product Reference Guide
EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 14 CHARACTERS
6-215
EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
EAN-8 MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 15 CHARACTERS
6-216
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
Other UPC/EAN Options
The following pages contain other selectable features for UPC/EAN symbologies:
•
•
•
•
•
Product Reference Guide
6-217
Price Weight Check
Enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits.
Applies to all UPC-A and EAN/JAN-13 labels with eligible
1
Number System/First Character digits.
Options are:
• Disable
• 4-digit price/weight
• 5-digit price/weight
• 4-digit European price/weight
• 5-digit European price/weight
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-218
PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = DISABLE
1. Price Weight Check generally applies to UPC-A labels with a Number System
Digit of 2 and EAN/JAN-13 labels with a First Character of 2. There are a total of six flag digits corresponding to the six types. Checking applies depending upon which type is enabled.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
Price Weight Check — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 4-DIGIT PRICE/WEIGHT
Product Reference Guide
PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 5-DIGIT PRICE/WEIGHT
6-219
Price Weight Check — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 4-DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE/WEIGHT
6-220
PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 5-DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE/WEIGHT
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
In-Store Label Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an In-Store
1
label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
IN-STORE MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
IN-STORE MINIMUM READS = 2
1. Instore labels are defined as UPC-A labels with a number-system character of 2 or 4 as well as EAN-8 and EAN-13 labels with a Flag1 character of 2 or an EAN-
13 label starting with the three characters '980'.
6-221
In-Store Label Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
IN-STORE MINIMUM READS = 3
6-222
IN-STORE MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
Enable EAN Two Label
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN two-label pairs.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Contact Customer Support for details about advanced programming for this feature.
EAN TWO LABEL = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
EAN TWO LABEL = ENABLE
6-223
EAN Two Label Combined Transmission
Enables/disables the transmitting of an EAN two label pair as one label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Contact Customer Support for details about advanced programming for this feature.
EAN TWO LABEL COMBINED TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
6-224
EAN TWO LABEL COMBINED TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
UPC/EAN Guard Insertion
Enables/Disables the ability of the scanner to insert either a missing leading or trailing guard on an otherwise complete UPC-A/EAN-13 segment it has received.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC/EAN GUARD INSERTION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
UPC/EAN GUARD INSERTION = ENABLE
6-225
UPC/EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves
When enabled, this allows the scanner the ability to stitch exact UPC-A /
EAN-13 label haves with no overlapping characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC/EAN STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES = DISABLE
6-226
UPC/EAN STITCH EXACT LABEL HALVES = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
UPC/EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves
When enabled, this allows the scanner the ability to stitch two UPC-A /
EAN-13 label halves together that may contain differing characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC/EAN STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
UPC/EAN STITCH UNLIKE LABEL HALVES = ENABLE
6-227
UPC/EAN Character Reconstruction
Enables/Disables character reconstruction on UPC/EAN labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC/EAN CHARACTER RECONSTRUCTION = DISABLE
6-228
UPC/EAN CHARACTER RECONSTRUCTION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
EAN Two Label Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an EAN Two Label bar code must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN TWO LABEL MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
EAN TWO LABEL MINIMUM READS = 2
6-229
EAN Two Label Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
EAN TWO LABEL MINIMUM READS = 3
6-230
EAN TWO LABEL MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
UPC/EAN Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for UPC/EAN.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC/EAN CORRELATION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
UPC/EAN CORRELATION = ENABLE
6-231
UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length
Specifies the minimum number of characters necessary in a UPC/EAN/
JAN label segment in order for the scanner to accept a label for decoding.
Selectable from 5 to 15 characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 5 CHARACTERS
6-232
UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 6 CHARACTERS
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 7 CHARACTERS
Product Reference Guide
UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 8 CHARACTERS
6-233
UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 9 CHARACTERS
6-234
UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 10 CHARACTERS
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 11 CHARACTERS
Product Reference Guide
UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 12 CHARACTERS
6-235
UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 13 CHARACTERS
6-236
UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 14 CHARACTERS
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
UPC/EAN MINIMUM SEGMENT LENGTH = 15 CHARACTERS
Product Reference Guide
6-237
Addons
Add-ons (or supplemental characters) are commonly added to the end of
UPC/EAN bar codes. The scanner will read the add-ons if they are enabled and in the field of view. Three add-on types are supported: 2digit, 5-digit and Code 128 add-ons. Supported options are:
None —
This option directs the scanner to ignore add-on portion of a
UPC/EAN bar code but still read the main portion of the bar code.
2 Digits —
The scanner will optionally read 2-digit add-ons with the
UPC/EAN label.
5 Digits —
The scanner will optionally read 5-digit add-ons with the
UPC/EAN label.
Code 128 Add-on —
The scanner will optionally read Code 128 addons with the UPC/EAN label.
Contact Customer Support for advanced programming of optional and conditional add-ons.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on this and the following page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-238
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
OPTIONAL 2-DIGIT ADD-ONS = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
OPTIONAL 2-DIGIT ADD-ONS = ENABLE
6-239
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
OPTIONAL 5-DIGIT ADD-ONS = DISABLE
6-240
OPTIONAL 5-DIGIT ADD-ONS = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
OPTIONAL CODE 128 ADD-ONS = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
OPTIONAL CODE 128 ADD-ONS = ENABLE
6-241
Addon Timer
When addons have been selected as optional, this feature sets the duration of time that the scanner can unsuccessfully look for an addon before proceeding to read a bar code. Timer duration is specified in 10ms increments.
To set the Addon Timer:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Addon Timer Duration. The selectable range is 1-
10, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a threedigit entry (001-010).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
003 = 30ms
008 = 80ms
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-242
SET ADDON TIMER DURATION
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
2-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of times a 2-digit addon must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
2-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 2
Product Reference Guide
2-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 3
6-243
2-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
2-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 4
6-244
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
5-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of times a 5-digit addon must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
5-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
5-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 2
6-245
5-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
5-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 3
6-246
5-DIGIT ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Other UPC/EAN Options
Code 128 Add-ons Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of times a Code 128 addon must be read before it is marked as valid and then combined with a base label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 128 ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
CODE 128 ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 2
6-247
Code 128 Add-ons Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
CODE 128 ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 3
6-248
CODE 128 ADD-ONS MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
GTIN Enable
GTIN Enable
Enables/Disables the ability to convert UPCE, UPCA, EAN8, and
EAN13 labels into the GTIN 14-character format.
NOTE
If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion taking place, the add-on information will be appended to the converted GTIN bar code.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
GTIN = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
GTIN = ENABLE
6-249
GTIN Label ID
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled.
NOTE
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs.
and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-250
SET GTIN LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
GTIN Enable
GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled and 2-digit supplemental addon bar code labels are converted.
NOTE
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET GTIN 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs.
and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET GTIN 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-251
GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled and 5-digit supplemental addon bar code labels are converted.
NOTE
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET GTIN 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs.
and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-252
SET GTIN 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
GTIN Enable
GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled and Code 128 supplemental addon bar code labels are converted
NOTE
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs.
and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID
6-253
DataBar Omnidirectional Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode DataBar Omnidirectional labels.
This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced capability.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
DataBar Omnidirectional = DISABLE
6-254
DataBar Omnidirectional = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
DataBar Omnidirectional Enable
DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 Emulation
Enables/disables the ability of DataBar Omnidirectional to be transmitted as EAN-128.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 EMULATION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 EMULATION = ENABLE
6-255
DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID
This feature specifies an DataBar Omnidirectional label ID to be added to bar code data.
To set this feature:
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether
the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
SET DataBar Omnidirectional LABEL ID
below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-256
SET DataBar Omnidirectional LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Reads
DataBar Omnidirectional Enable
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an DataBar Omnidirectional label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM READS = 2
6-257
DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM READS = 3
6-258
DataBar Omnidirectional MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
DataBar Expanded Enable
DataBar Expanded Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode DataBar Expanded labels.
This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced capability.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
DataBar Expanded = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
DataBar Expanded = ENABLE
6-259
DataBar Expanded EAN-128 Emulation
Enables/disables EAN-128 emulation for DataBar Expanded.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
DataBar Expanded/EAN-128 EMULATION = DISABLE
6-260
DataBar Expanded/EAN-128 EMULATION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
DataBar Expanded Enable
DataBar Expanded Label ID
This feature specifies an DataBar Expanded label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether
the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET DataBar Expanded LABEL ID
6-261
DataBar Expanded Length Control
This feature specifies either variable-length or fixed-length decoding for
DataBar Expanded.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
.
NOTE
DataBar Expanded LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
6-262
DataBar Expanded LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
DataBar Expanded Enable
DataBar Expanded Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
. Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
01 to 74. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-074).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 1
6-263
DataBar Expanded Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the
second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
. Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 074. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-074).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-264
SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
DataBar Expanded Enable
DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an DataBar
Expanded label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
DataBar Expanded MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
DataBar Expanded MINIMUM READS = 2
6-265
DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
DataBar Expanded MINIMUM READS = 3
6-266
DataBar Expanded MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 39 Enable
Code 39 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 39 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 39 = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
CODE 39 = ENABLE
6-267
Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters.
This feature applies only when
Code 39 Check Character Calculation
is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
6-268
CODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 39 Enable
Code 39 Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check character. When disabled, any check character in label is treated as a data character.
If check calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur.
NOTE
In particular, if you are using variable length stitching, it is important to use check character calculation to prevent misreads.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE
6-269
Code 39 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of optional Code 39 check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
6-270
CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 39 Enable
Code 39 Full ASCII
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to translate to Code 39 full
ASCII labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 39 FULL ASCII = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
CODE 39 FULL ASCII = ENABLE
6-271
Code 39 Label ID
This feature specifies a Code 39 label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-272
SET CODE 39 LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 39 Enable
Code 39 Require Quiet Zones
When enabled, this feature requires that quiet zones (margins) be present for Code 39 labels. When disabled, quiet zones are optional.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 39 REQUIRE QUIET ZONES = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
CODE 39 REQUIRE QUIET ZONES = ENABLE
6-273
Code 39 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Code 39.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
You must now set the features
NOTE
When using variable length stitching, it is important to enable
Code 39 Check Character Calculation
CODE 39 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
6-274
CODE 39 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 39 Enable
Code 39 Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
.
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET CODE 39 LENGTH 1
6-275
Code 39 Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
)
.
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired fixed label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-276
SET CODE 39 LENGTH 2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 39 Enable
Code 39 Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for Code 39.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 39 CORRELATION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
CODE 39 CORRELATION = ENABLE
6-277
Code 39 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Code 39 labels. When parts of a Code 39 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 39 STITCHING = DISABLE
6-278
CODE 39 STITCHING = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 39 Enable
Code 39 Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 39 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 39 MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
CODE 39 MINIMUM READS = 2
6-279
Code 39 Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
CODE 39 MINIMUM READS = 3
6-280
CODE 39 MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Pharmacode 39 Enable
Pharmacode 39 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Italian Pharmacode
39 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
PHARMACODE 39 = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
PHARMACODE 39 = ENABLE
6-281
Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission
Enables/ disables transmission of start and stop characters for Pharmacode
39.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
PHARMACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
6-282
PHARMACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Pharmacode 39 Enable
Pharmacode 39 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of Pharmacode 39 check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
PHARMACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
PHARMACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Product Reference Guide
6-283
Pharmacode 39 Label ID
This feature specifies a Pharmacode 39 label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-284
SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 128 Enable
Code 128 Enable
Enables/disables
1
the ability of the scanner to decode Code 128 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 128 = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
CODE 128 = ENABLE
1. Exception: The Code 128 symbology is always enabled with regard to scanning/ reading the special C128 programming bar codes provided in this manual.
6-285
Code 128 Transmit Function Characters
Enables/disables transmission of Code 128 function characters 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Disabled is the recommended setting for all interfaces.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS = DISABLE
6-286
CODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 128 Enable
Convert Code 128 to Code 39
Enables/disables conversion of Code 128 labels to Code 39.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CONVERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
CONVERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 = ENABLE
6-287
Code 128 Label ID
This feature specifies a Code 128 label ID to be added to bar code data..
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-288
SET CODE 128 LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 128 Enable
Code 128 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Code 128.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
You must now set the features
NOTE
CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
Product Reference Guide
CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
6-289
Code 128 Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the
first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
.
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
001 to 080. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-080).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-290
SET CODE 128 LENGTH 1
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 128 Enable
Code 128 Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the
second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
. Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 080. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-080).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET CODE 128 LENGTH 2
6-291
Code 128 Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for Code 128.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 128 CORRELATION = DISABLE
6-292
CODE 128 CORRELATION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 128 Enable
Code 128 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Code 128 labels. When parts of a Code 128 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 128 STITCHING = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
CODE 128 STITCHING = ENABLE
6-293
Code 128 Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 128 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 128 MINIMUM READS = 1
6-294
CODE 128 MINIMUM READS = 2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 128 Enable
Code 128 Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
CODE 128 MINIMUM READS = 3
Product Reference Guide
CODE 128 MINIMUM READS = 4
6-295
EAN-128 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN-128 labels.
When disabled, EAN128 labels are transmitted in Code128 data format.
When enabled, EAN128 labels are transmitted in EAN128 data format
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
EAN-128 = DISABLE
6-296
EAN-128 = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-128 Enable
EAN-128 Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-128 label ID to be added to bar code data..
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET EAN-128 LABEL ID
6-297
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
I 2 OF 5 = DISABLE
6-298
I 2 OF 5 = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Interleaved 2 of 5 check character.
If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are treated as data characters.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE
6-299
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Interleaved 2 of 5 check character.
This feature applies only when
I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
6-300
I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable
I 2 of 5 Label ID
This feature specifies an I 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code data..
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET I 2 of 5 LABEL ID
6-301
I 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for I 2 of 5.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
You must now set the features
NOTE
I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
6-302
I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable
I 2 of 5 Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
.
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
002 to 050, even numbers only. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (002-050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET I 2 of 5 LENGTH 1
6-303
I 2 of 5 Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the
second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
.
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 002 to 050, even numbers only. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry
(002-050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-304
SET I 2 of 5 LENGTH 2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable
I 2 of 5 Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for I 2 of 5.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
I 2 of 5 CORRELATION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
I 2 of 5 CORRELATION = ENABLE
6-305
I 2 of 5 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for I 2 of 5 labels. When parts of an I 2 of 5 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
I 2 of 5 Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY.
must be properly configured for
stitching to work.
NOTE
I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = DISABLE
6-306
I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an I 2 of 5 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
I 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
I 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 2
6-307
I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
I 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 3
6-308
I 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable
Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Standard 2 of 5 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
STANDARD 2 OF 5 = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
STANDARD 2 OF 5 = ENABLE
6-309
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of
5 check character.
If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are treated as data characters.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE
6-310
STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character.
This feature applies only when
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character
is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Product Reference Guide
6-311
Standard 2 of 5 Label ID
This feature specifies a Standard 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code data..
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-312
SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Standard 2 of 5.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
You must now set
and
NOTE
STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
Product Reference Guide
STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
6-313
Standard 2 of 5 Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the
first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control
. Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-314
SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable
Standard 2 of 5 Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the
second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
. Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2
6-315
Standard 2 of 5 Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for Standard 2 of 5.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
STANDARD 2 of 5 CORRELATION = DISABLE
6-316
STANDARD 2 of 5 CORRELATION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Standard 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a Standard 2 of 5 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY.
Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 and/or Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 must
be properly configured for stitching to work.
NOTE
I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = ENABLE
6-317
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Standard 2 of 5 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
STANDARD 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 1
6-318
STANDARD 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
STANDARD 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 3
Product Reference Guide
STANDARD 2 of 5 MINIMUM READS = 4
6-319
Codabar Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Codabar labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODABAR = DISABLE
6-320
CODABAR = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Codabar Enable
Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of Codabar start and stop characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
6-321
Codabar Start Stop Character Set
This feature selects the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop characters.
Options are:
• ABCD/TN* E
• ABCD/ABCD
• abcd/tn* e
• abcd/abcd
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page representing the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes and facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = ABCD/TN* E
6-322
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = ABCD/ABCD
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Codabar Enable
Codabar Start Stop Character Set — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = abcd/tn* e
Product Reference Guide
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = abcd/abcd
6-323
Codabar Start Stop Character Match
Enables/disables the requirement that start and stop characters match.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER MATCH = DISABLE
6-324
CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER MATCH = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Codabar Enable
Codabar Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check character.
If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are treated as data characters.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE
6-325
Codabar Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Codabar check character.
Applies only when
Codabar Check Character Calculation
enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
6-326
CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Codabar Enable
Codabar Label ID
This feature specifies a Codabar label ID to e added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates
whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if
Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET CODABAR LABEL ID
6-327
Codabar Require Quiet Zones
When enabled, this feature requires that quiet zones (margins) be present for Codabar labels. When disabled, quiet zones are optional.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODABAR REQUIRE QUIET ZONES = DISABLE
6-328
CODABAR REQUIRE QUIET ZONES = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Codabar Enable
Codabar Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Codabar.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
NOTE
CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
Product Reference Guide
CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
6-329
Codabar Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
.
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
003 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (003-050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-330
SET CODABAR LENGTH 1
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Codabar Enable
Codabar Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
)
.
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 003 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (003-050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET CODABAR LENGTH 2
6-331
Codabar Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for Codabar.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODABAR CORRELATION = DISABLE
6-332
CODABAR CORRELATION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Codabar Enable
Codabar Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Codabar labels. When parts of a Codabar bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Codabar Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY.
for stitching to work.
NOTE
CODABAR STITCHING = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
CODABAR STITCHING = ENABLE
6-333
Codabar Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Codabar label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODABAR MINIMUM READS = 1
6-334
CODABAR MINIMUM READS = 2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Codabar Enable
Codabar Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
CODABAR MINIMUM READS = 3
Product Reference Guide
CODABAR MINIMUM READS = 4
6-335
Code 93 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 93 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 93 = DISABLE
6-336
CODE 93 = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 93 Enable
Code 93 Label ID
This feature specifies a Code 93 label ID to be added to bar code data..
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether
the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET CODE 93 LABEL ID
6-337
Code 93 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for Code 93.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
You must now set the features
NOTE
CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
6-338
CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 93 Enable
Code 93 Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
.
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET CODE 93 LENGTH 1
6-339
Code 93 Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
)
.
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-050).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-340
SET CODE 93 LENGTH 2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 93 Enable
Code 93 Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for Code 93.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 93 CORRELATION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
CODE 93 CORRELATION = ENABLE
6-341
Code 93 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Code 93 labels. When parts of a Code 93 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 93 STITCHING = DISABLE
6-342
CODE 93 STITCHING = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 93 Enable
Code 93 Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times a Code 93 label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
CODE 93 MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
CODE 93 MINIMUM READS = 2
6-343
Code 93 Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
CODE 93 MINIMUM READS = 3
6-344
CODE 93 MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
MSI/Plessey Enable
MSI/Plessey Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode MSI/Plessey labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
MSI/PLESSEY = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
MSI/PLESSEY = ENABLE
6-345
MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of optional MSI/Plessey check characters.
If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are treated as data characters.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE
6-346
MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
MSI/Plessey Enable
MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters
Specifies number of MSI/Plessey check characters to be calculated and verified.
Check characters are always modulus 10.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired number of MSI/
Plessey check characters to be calculated and verified. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
MSI/PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS = 1
Product Reference Guide
MSI/PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS = 2
6-347
MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of optional MSI/Plessey check characters.
This feature applies only when
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE
6-348
MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
MSI/Plessey Enable
MSI/Plessey Label ID
This feature specifies an MSI/Plessey label ID to be added to bar code data.
The programming feature, Label ID Control, designates whether
the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET MSI/PLESSEY LABEL ID
6-349
MSI/Plessey Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding will be set for MSI/Plessey.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
You must now set the features
and
.
NOTE
MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH
6-350
MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
MSI/Plessey Enable
MSI/Plessey Length 1
Length 1 is the minimum label length if in variable length mode, or the first fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
. Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is
004 to 016. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (004-016).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
Product Reference Guide
SET MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH 1
6-351
MSI/Plessey Length 2
Length 2 is the maximum label length if in variable length mode, or the second fixed length if in fixed length mode (see
)
.
Length includes the barcode’s check and data characters.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code,
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in
resent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 004 to 016. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (004-016).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
6-352
SET MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH 2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
MSI/Plessey Enable
MSI/Plessey Correlation
This feature enables/disables character correlation for MSI/Plessey.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
MSI/PLESSEY CORRELATION = DISABLE
Product Reference Guide
MSI/PLESSEY CORRELATION = ENABLE
6-353
MSI/Plessey Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for MSI/Plessey labels. When parts of an MSI/
Plessey bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
MSI/Plessey Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY.
and/or
configured for stitching to work.
NOTE
MSI/PLESSEY STITCHING = DISABLE
6-354
MSI/PLESSEY STITCHING = ENABLE
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
MSI/Plessey Enable
MSI/Plessey Minimum Reads
Specifies the minimum number of consecutive times an MSI/Plessey label must be decoded before it is accepted as a good read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM READS = 1
Product Reference Guide
MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM READS = 2
6-355
MSI/Plessey Minimum Reads — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM READS = 3
6-356
MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM READS = 4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Appendix A
LED/Beeper Indications & Controls
shows the operator’s controls and indicators. The descriptions following identify the use or function of each component.
Figure A-1. Scanner and Scale Controls
Scanner
LED Indicator
Volume/Tone
Button
Scale Zero
Button & LED
Speaker
(Beeper)
Port
Controls and Indicators
The control panel consists of a green LED indicator, a Volume/Tone push button and a Scale Zero push button/LED indicator as described in the following pages. The unit also includes a beeper which can be configured to sound indications of scanning, weighing, and deactivation activities.
Since beeper indications are configurable, your unit may not be programmed to sound all the indications listed. For
ual.
NOTE
Product Reference Guide
A-1
LED and Beeper Indications
Scanner and Scale LEDs
The Scanner LED indicates scanner status, and the Scale LED (which is in combination with the Scale push button) is primarily used to show scale status (see
).
Table A-1. Scanner and Scale LED Indications
LED
INDICATION
DURATION COMMENT
Scale (Yellow) LED on steady
The scale is at rest and reads zero weight.
The scale is ready to weigh.
Scanner
Active a
(Normal
Mode)
Scanner (Green) LED on steady and dim
The scanner is ready for operation. Scanning is immediately available.
Good Read
Indication
Scanner (Green) LED - bright flash
Indicates a bar code has been read and decoded.
Program
Mode
Indication
Sleep Mode
Indication
Scanner (Green) LED - Continuous flashing
Scanner (Green) LED flashes slowly
Indicates the scanner is in Label Programming Mode. Cycle power to exit Programming
Mode.
The scanner motor and/or laser have automatically switched off and the unit has entered Sleep Mode due to extended inactivity.
Host Disabled
Scanner (Green) LED 1-second off, 1/10-second on Host has disabled scanning.
Field Replaceable Unit
(FRU) Warning (Error
Mode)
Audible low tone 1 second.
Alternating Scanner/Scale (Green/
Yellow) LEDs flash continuously.
Serves notice that a fatal FRU failure has
been detected. Consult Error Codes in
for more details. If a low tone is
heard, but continuous flashing is not observed, the scanner can still function in a limited capacity. Call systems support for service in either case.
A-2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Controls and Indicators
Table A-1. Scanner and Scale LED Indications
LED
INDICATION
DURATION
FRU Indication
Scanner (Green) LED flashes a coded sequence in concert with the speaker.
COMMENT
Occurs ONLY upon Volume/Tone button push following a FRU warning. Enables service technicians to identify FRU failures.
a. Certain functions of the Green and Yellow LEDs are selectable to be enabled or disabled. Your scanner may not be programmed to display all indications.
Volume/Tone Push Button
NOTE
The Volume/Tone Push Button also performs multiple functions depending upon the duration of time it is pressed:
The Volume/Tone Push Button must be configured to enable standard functions, or the features described in
will not apply. Reference
Chapter 6, Scanner Button Options
for programming details.
Volume changes made using the Volume/Tone Push Button are lost when the scanner is powered-down and are reset to the factory default setting. If you wish to permanently change the volume, use the special programming labels in
Chapter 6, Good Read Beep Volume
Table A-2. Volume/Tone Push Button Functions
PRESS
DURATION
FUNCTION
Momentary (when scanner is asleep)
Wakes scanner from
Sleep Mode
COMMENT
Alternatively, the scanner can be awakened by:
- Moving an object through the scan zone.
- A weight change on the scale.
- Scanning with an attached auxiliary scanner.
Product Reference Guide
A-3
Table A-2. Volume/Tone Push Button Functions (Continued)
PRESS
DURATION
FUNCTION COMMENT
Momentary (when scanner is awake)
Increments volume
Hold, then release when the beeper sounds
Increments tone
4 Seconds
8 Seconds
Scanner Diagnostics
Mode a
Resets Scanner b
Press the push button momentarily to increase speaker volume. When the loudest volume is reached, a repeated press of the push button cycles volume back to the lowest setting, then volume increases on subsequent press(es). Four volume levels are available.
Press the push button for approximately 2 seconds, then release. Each time this is done, the beeper will sound at one of three tones. Stop when the desired tone (high, medium or low) is sounded.
This mode allows system support personnel to troubleshoot problems with the scanner. Upon entering Scanner Diagnostic Mode, view the 7segment display to view Interface Type, Bootloader Version Number, Application Version Number and Configuration File Number. This mode is used to determine if a scanner can read bar codes. Press the button for eight seconds or cycle power to exit Scanner Diagnostics Mode and reset the scanner.
Only system support personnel should perform a reset.
a. Diagnostics Mode is meant for use by trained systems support personnel. Users should not need to initiate this function under normal circumstances.
b. Users should not perform scanner resets except under the direction of trained systems support personnel.
A-4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Controls and Indicators
Scale Zero Push Button
NOTE
The Scale Zero Push Button is used for multiple functions as listed in
The Scale Zero Push Button has no function in a “scanner only” model.
The button must be configured to enable standard functions, or Scale Diagnostics will not be an available feature.
Reference
Chapter 6, Scanner Button Options
ming details.
Table A-3. Scale Zero Push Button Functions
PRESS
DURATION
FUNCTION
Momentary
4 Seconds
COMMENT
Zero Scale
Scale Diagnostics
Mode a
When programmed to do so, the yellow LED should be lit when no weight is on the scale, indicating scale at zero. If it is not, press the switch to zero the scale.
This mode allows system support personnel to troubleshoot problems with the scale. Momentarily press the Scale Zero
Push Button or cycle power to exit Scale Diagnostics Mode.
a. Diagnostics Mode is meant for use by trained systems support personnel. Users should not need to initiate this function under normal circumstances.
Product Reference Guide
A-5
Calibration Switch
This switch initiates the scale’s calibration routine. A certified weight set is needed to perform the scale calibration steps detailed in
. This switch is not included in scanners without scale modules.
Calibration Switch Seal
This seal allows you to secure the Calibration Switch access cover and restrict access to the Calibration Switch. If the calibration seal is broken or missing, you may be prohibited from operating the scale without recertification. Check local and state requirements for specific restrictions.
Calibration Switch
LEGAL NOTE
A cover restricts access to the Calibration Switch to help guard against unauthorized tampering when sealed. The Calibration Switch is located just beneath the Spider in the location indicated in
.
LEGAL NOTE
There are regulations that must be followed in order to ensure compliance when operating a weighing device such as the scanner/scale. Failure to observe and comply with these regulations could result in legal action.
Figure A-1. Calibration Switch
Spider
Calibration
Switch
A-6
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Appendix B
Cable Information
Introduction
The following pages contain pinout information, enabling you to create standard interface cables for use in interconnecting the scanner, scale, external handheld scanner, and POS terminal.
General Specifications
Wire Requirements
• Cable length should not exceed 15 feet.
• Wire gauge = Standard for RJ-45 connectors (28-26 AWG).
• If run exceeds 15 feet, we recommend 26 AWG wire size.
B-1
Product Reference Guide
RS-232 Cable Pinout
Scanner
Connector Hardware
RJ45, 10 Position
Cable Pinout
Table B-1RS-232 Cable Pinouts
PIN # FUNCTION
7
8
5
6
9
10
3
4
1
2
N/C
CTS in
N/C
RTS out
RxD in
TxD out
N/C
N/C
GND
N/C
DESCRIPTION
No Connection
Clear To Send (input)
No Connection
Request To Send (output)
Receive Data (Input)
Transmit Data (output)
No Connection
No Connection
Signal Ground
No Connection
B-2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232 Cable Pinout — continued
Scale
Connector Hardware
RJ45, 10 Position
Cable Pinout
Table B-2RS-232 Scale Cable Pinouts
PIN #
7
8
5
6
9
10
3
4
1
2
FUNCTION
+5V pullup
CTS IN
N/C
RTS OUT
RxD IN
TxD OUT
N/C
N/C
Gnd
N/C
DESCRIPTION
+5V pullup
Clear To Send (input)
No Connection
Request To Send (output)
Receive Data (Input)
Transmit Data (output)
No Connection
No Connection
Signal Ground
No Connection
Introduction
Product Reference Guide
B-3
IBM Cable Pinout
Scanner and Scale
Connector Hardware
RJ45, 10 Position
Cable Pinout
Table B-3IBM Cable Pinouts
PIN #
7
8
5
6
9
10
3
4
1
2
FUNCTION
N/C
N/C
N/C
LINEB
N/C
LINEA
N/C
N/C
GND
N/C
DESCRIPTION
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
Line B
No Connection
Line A
No Connection
No Connection
Signal Ground
No Connection
B-4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
OEM USB Cable Pinout
OEM USB Cable Pinout
Scanner and Scale
Connector Hardware
RJ45, 10 Position
Cable Pinout
Table B-4. OEM USB Cable Pinouts
PIN #
7
8
5
6
9
10
3
4
1
2
FUNCTION
N/C
N/C
VBUS
USB D-
N/C
USB D+
N/C
N/C
GND
N/C
DESCRIPTION
No Connection
No Connection
USB VBUS
USB D-
No Connection
USB D+
No Connection
No Connection
Signal Ground
No Connection
Product Reference Guide
B-5
Auxilliary Port
External Handheld Input
Connector Hardware
RJ45, 10 Position
Cable Pinout
Table B-5Auxilliary Port Cable Pinouts
PIN #
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
8
9
10
FUNCTION
+5V pullup
CTS in
N/C
RTS out
RxD in
TxD out
N/C
+5V out (500mA max)
GND
N/C
DESCRIPTION
+5V pullup
Clear To Send (input)
No Connection - Reserved
Request To Send (output)
Receive Data (Input)
Transmit Data (output)
No Connection
+5V out
Signal Ground
No Connection
B-6
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Power Cable
Connector Hardware
3 pin Molex
Cable Pinout
Table B-6Power Cable Pinouts
PIN #
1
2
3
FUNCTION
EARTH GND
SIGNAL GND
+12V IN
DESCRIPTION
Earth Ground
Signal Ground
+12V in
Power Cable
Product Reference Guide
B-7
Remote Display
Connector Hardware
4 pin SDL
Cable Pinout
Table B-7Remote Display Cable Pinouts
PIN #
3
4
1
2
FUNCTION
+12V OUT
LINE_A_DSPLY
LINE_B_DSPLY
GND
DESCRIPTION
+12V out
LINE A Display
LINE B Display
Ground
B-8
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAS Comm Port (Sensormatic
®
systems ON-
EAS Comm Port (Sensormatic
®
systems ONLY)
EAS Deactivator Control Box Connection
Connector Hardware
RJ4
Cable Pinout
Table B-8. EAS Port Cable Pinouts
PIN #
1
2
3
FUNCTION
GND
+5V Out
External Read Indicator
4 Audio Out
GND
+5V Out
DESCRIPTION
When configured, signifies good read
Intended to drive an external amplifier that drives and external speaker.
Product Reference Guide
B-9
NOTES
B-10
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Appendix C
Keypad
Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
0
Product Reference Guide
1
C-1
Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
2
C-2
3
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
4
Product Reference Guide
5
C-3
Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
6
C-4
7
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
8
Product Reference Guide
9
C-5
Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
A
C-6
B
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
C
Product Reference Guide
D
C-7
Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers and characters as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
E
C-8
F
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Appendix D
Host Commands
Accepting Commands from an RS-232 Scanner Host
The scanner responds to the following RS-232 commands:
COMMENT COMMAND
Enable Scanner
Disable Scanner
Reset Scanner
Not On File Indication
Beep Good Read Tone
Force Good Read Tone
Bel
Identification request
Health request
Status request
ASCII
R
F
E
D
B i h s
HEX
0x45
0x44
0x52
0x46
0x42
0x01
0x07
0x69
0x68
0x73
Long series of beeps
Beeps if Good Read Beep is enabled
Beeps regardless of beep setting
Force Good Read Tone
Returns long response a
a. Call Tech Support for information.
If one of the above commands is received, the scanner will perform the steps indicated for the command. Host commands for other interfaces is also available. Contact Tech Support for more details.
Product Reference Guide
D-1
NOTES
D-2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Appendix E
Keyboard Function Key
Mappings
Keyboard Model Cross Reference
summarizes the keyboard models, their defined protocol, scancode set, and some unique features. The remaining tables in this chapter provide the function key maps associated with each of the scancode sets.
Product Reference Guide
E-1
Table E-1. Keyboard Model Cross Reference
Model Type
PC/XT Foreign ALT Mode
I/F ID
Wedge A
Transmission
Protoco l
Scancod e
Set
Func.
Key
Map
Suppor t
Use
Countr y
Mode
PC/XT
Scan Set
1
No No
AT;
PS/2 25-286;
PS/2 30-286;
PS/2 50, 50Z;
PS/2 60,70,80,90,95
Foreign ALT Mode
PS/2 25 and 30
Foreign ALT Mode
PC/XT U.S. Mode
Wedge B
Wedge C
Wedge D
AT/PS2
AT/PS2
PC/XT
Scan Set
2
Scan Set
1
Scan Set
1
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
AT;
PS/2 25-286;
PS/2 30-286;
PS/2 50, 50Z;
PS/2 60,70,80,90,95
U.S. Mode + specific country support
PS/2 25 and 30
U.S. Mode
IBM 3xxx Terminals
(122-key keyboard)
IBM 3xxx Terminals
(102-key keyboard)
PS55 5530T with
JAPANESE DOS (TDOS)
NEC 9801
Wedge E
Wedge F
Wedge
G
Wedge H
AT/PS2
Wedge I
AT/PS2
Wedge J
AT/PS2
AT/PS2
AT/PS2
NEC
9801
Scan Set
2
Scan Set
1
Scan Set
3
Scan Set
3
Japanese
DOS
NEC
9801
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
E-2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Table E-2. Scanset 1 Function Key Map
ASCII
(hex)
ASCII code
0C
0D
0E
0F
08
09
0A
0B
10
11
12
13
14
04
05
06
07
00
01
02
03
Key
NUL
ALT right Make
SOH
ALT right Break
STX
ALT left Make
ETX
ALT left Break
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
CTRL left Make
CTRL left Break
CTRL right Make
CTRL right Break
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
BS
TAB right
RIGHT arrow (inner keypad)
TAB left
Enter (inner keypad)
CR
INSERT (inner keypad)
PAGE UP (inner keypad)
PAGE DOWN (inner keypad)
HOME (inner keypad)
LEFT arrow (inner keypad)
DOWN arrow (inner keypad)
UP arrow (inner keypad)
Scancode
E0h 38h
E0h B8h
38h
B8h
1Dh
9Dh
E0h 1Dh
E0h 9Dh
0Eh
0Fh
4Dh + E0
0Fh + S
1Ch + E0
1Ch
52h + E0
49h + E0
51h + E0
47h + E0
4Bh + E0
50h + E0
48h + E0
Keyboard Model Cross Reference
Product Reference Guide
E-3
Table E-3. Scanset 2 Function Key Map
ASCII
(hex)
1C
1D
1E
1F
18
19
1A
1B
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
0C
0D
0E
0F
08
09
0A
0B
04
05
06
07
00
01
02
03
ASCII code Key Scancode
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
NUL
ALT right Make
SOH
ALT right Break
STX
ALT left Make
ETX
ALT left Break
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
CTRL left Make
CTRL left Break
CTRL right Make
CTRL right Break
BS
TAB right
RIGHT arrow (inner keypad)
TAB left
Enter (right keypad)
CR
INSERT (inner keypad)
PAGE UP (inner keypad)
PAGE DOWN (inner keypad) 7Ah + E0
HOME (inner keypad)
LEFT arrow (inner keypad)
DOWN arrow (inner keypad)
UP arrow (inner keypad)
F6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
ESC
F7
F8
F9
F10
E0h 11h
E0h F0h 11h
11h
F0h 11h
14h
F0h 14h
E0h 14h
E0h F0h 14h
66h
0Dh
74h + E0
0Dh + S
5Ah + E0
5Ah
70h + E0
7Dh + E0
6Ch + E0
6Bh + E0
72h + E0
75h + E0
0Bh
05h
06h
04h
0Ch
03h
76h
83h
0Ah
01h
09h
E-4
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Table E-4
.
Scanset 3, 102-Key Function Key Map
ASCII (hex) ASCII code
1C
1D
1E
1F
18
19
1A
1B
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
0C
0D
0E
0F
08
09
0A
0B
04
05
06
07
00
01
02
03
Key Scancode
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
NUL
ALT right Make
SOH
ALT right Break
STX
ALT left Make
ETX
ALT left Break
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
CTRL left Make
CTRL left Break
CTRL right Make
CTRL right Break
BS
TAB right
RIGHT arrow (inner keypad) 6Ah
TAB left
Enter (inner keypad)
CR
INSERT (inner keypad)
PAGE UP (inner keypad)
39h
F0h 39h
19h
F0h 19h
11h
F0h 11h
58h
F0h 58h
66h
0Dh
0Dh + S
79h
5Ah
67h
6Fh
PAGE DOWN (inner keypad) 6Dh
HOME (inner keypad)
LEFT arrow (inner keypad)
6Eh
61h
DOWN arrow (inner keypad) 60h
UP arrow (inner keypad)
F6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
ESC
F7
F8
F9
F10
63h
2Fh
07h
0Fh
17h
1Fh
27h
08h
37h
3Fh
47h
4Fh
Keyboard Model Cross Reference
Product Reference Guide
E-5
Table E-5. Scanset 3 122-Key Function Key Map
ASCII
(hex)
1C
1D
1E
1F
18
19
1A
1B
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
0C
0D
0E
0F
08
09
0A
0B
04
05
06
07
00
01
02
03
ASCII code
Key Scancode
NUL
ALT Right Make
SOH
ALT Right Break
STX
ALT left Make
ETX
ALT left Break
39h
F0h 39h
19h
F0h 19h
EOT
CTRL left (RESET) Make only 11h
ENQ
CTRL left (RESET) Make/Break 11h F0h 11h
ACK
ONLINE Enter Make only
BEL
ONLINE Enter Make/Break
58h
58h F0h 58h
BS
HT
LF
VT
BS
TAB right
RIGHT arrow (inner keypad)
TAB left
FF
CR (FIELD EXIT) Make only
CR
CR (FIELD EXIT) Make/Break
SO
SI
INSERT (inner keypad)
FIELD +
66h
0Dh
6Ah
0Dh + S
5Ah F0h 5Ah
5Ah
65h
79h
DLE
FIELD -
DC1
HOME (inner keypad)
DC2
LEFT arrow (inner keypad)
DC3
DOWN arrow (inner keypad)
DC4
UP arrow (inner keypad)
NAK
F6
SYN
F1
ETB
F2
CAN
F3
EM
F4
SUB
F5
ESC
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
F7
F8
F9
F10
7Ch
62h
61h
60h
63h
2Fh
07h
0Fh
17h
1Fh
27h
08h
37h
3Fh
47h
4Fh
E-6
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Table E-6. Japanese DOS Function Key Map
ASCII value ASCII code
18h
19h
1Ah
1Bh
1Ch
1Dh
1Eh
1Fh
10h
11h
12h
13h
14h
15h
16h
17h
08h
09h
0Ah
0Bh
0Ch
0Dh
0Eh
0Fh
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
05h
06h
07h
Key
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
NUL
ALT right Make
SOH
ALT right Break
STX
ETX
ALT left Make
ALT left Break
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
CTRL left Make
CTRL left Break
CTRL right Make
CTRL right Break
BS
TAB right
RIGHT arrow (inner keypad)
TAB left
Enter (right keypad)
CR
INSERT (inner keypad)
PAGE UP (inner keypad)
PAGE DOWN (inner keypad)
HOME (inner keypad)
LEFT arrow (inner keypad)
DOWN arrow (inner keypad)
UP arrow (inner keypad)
F6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
ESC
F7
F8
F9
F10
Scancode
6Ah
6Bh
6Ch
3Dh
6Eh
6Fh
70h
71h
51h
4Ch
4Bh
4Ah
4Eh
6Dh
68h
69h
3Eh
3Ch
4Dh
3Ch + S
60h
3Bh
52h
49h
31h
B1h
31h
B1h
41h
C1h
41h
C1h
Keyboard Model Cross Reference
Product Reference Guide
E-7
Table E-7. NEC 9801-Key Function Key Map
19h
1Ah
1Bh
1Ch
1Dh
1Eh
1Fh
11h
12h
13h
14h
15h
16h
17h
18h
ASCII value ASCII code
08h
09h
0Ah
0Bh
0Ch
0Dh
0Eh
0Fh
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
05h
06h
07h
10h
Key
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
NUL unused
SOH
CR
STX
ETX
CAPS LOCK ON (make)
CAPS LOCK OFF (break)
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
CTRL left Make
CTRL left Break
CTRL-C n/a
BS
TAB right
RIGHT arrow (inner keypad)
TAB left
DELETE
CR
INSERT (inner keypad)
KATAKANA LOCK ON (Make)
DLE
KATAKANA LOCK OFF
(Break)
HOME (inner keypad)
LEFT arrow (inner keypad)
DOWN arrow (inner keypad)
UP arrow (inner keypad)
F6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
ESC
F7
F8
F9
F10
Scancode
0Eh
0Fh
3Ch
0Fh + S
39h
1Ch
38h
72h n/a
1Ch
71h
F1h
74h
F4h
60h n/a
F2h
65h
66h
00h
68h
69h
6Ah
6Bh
3Eh
3Bh
3Dh
3Ah
67h
62h
63h
64h
E-8
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Table E-8. USB Keyboard Function Key Usage Map
Key Value
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
FF
CR
SO
SI
BS
HT
LF
VT
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
ASCII
1C
1D
1E
1F
18
19
1A
1B
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
0C
0D
0E
0F
08
09
0A
0B
04
05
06
07
00
01
02
03
Usage Name
ALT right Make
ALT right Break
F11
F12
GUI right Make
GUI right Break
CTRL right Make
CTRL right Break
BS
TAB right
RIGHT arrow (inner keypad)
TAB left
Enter (right keypad)
CR
INSERT (inner keypad)
PAGE UP (inner keypad)
F3
F4
F5
ESC
F7
F8
F9
F10
PAGE DOWN (inner keypad)
HOME (inner keypad)
LEFT arrow (inner keypad)
DOWN arrow (inner keypad)
UP arrow (inner keypad)
F6
F1
F2
Keyboard Model Cross Reference
Product Reference Guide
E-9
NOTES
E-10
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Appendix F
Factory Defaults
The following table provides a listing of the most common factory settings for the interfaces shown.
Table F-1. Factory Default Settings
Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)/Cashier Training
RS-232
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Enable Std
Functions
400ms
5 min.
10 min.
160 msec
Disable
19200
Single OK
Enable Std
Functions
400ms
5 min.
10 min.
160 msec
Enable
Handheld
19200
Single OK
RS-232
Single
Cable
Enable Std
Functions
400ms
5 min.
10 min.
160 msec
Keybd.
Wedge
Enable Std
Functions
400ms
5 min.
10 min.
160 msec
IBM OEM USB
Enable Std
Functions
400ms
5 min.
10 min.
160 msec
Enable Std
Functions
400ms
5 min.
10 min.
160 msec
Disable
19200
Single OK
Disable
19200
Single OK
Disable
19200
Single OK
Disable
19200
Single OK
Disable
On dim
1 beep
Enable
Medium
80ms
Disable
On dim
1 beep
Enable
Medium
80ms
Disable
On dim
1 beep
Enable
Medium
80ms
Disable
On dim
1 beep
Enable
Medium
80ms
Disable
On dim
1 beep
Enable
Medium
80ms
Disable
On dim
1 beep
Enable
Medium
80ms
Product Reference Guide
F-1
High
After decode
Enable
3 (nonzero for 4 minutes)
RS-232
SASI
Scale Calibration Notification
Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length
Number of Host Transmission Buffers
Disable
No delay
Enable
Low
20ms
No limit
2 buffers
Disable
Enable as prefix
00 ("")
0D00
(<CR>)
No conversion
RS-232
Wincor-
Nixdorf
High
After decode
Enable
3 (nonzero for 4 minutes)
RS-232
SASI
Disable
No delay
Enable
Low
20ms
No limit
1 buffer
RS-232
Single
Cable
High
After decode
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Low
20ms
No limit
2 buffers
Disable
Enable as prefix
00 ("")
0D00
(<CR>)
No conversion
Disable
Enable as prefix
00 ("")
00 ("")
No conversion
10
(custom options)
Keybd.
Wedge
High
After decode
Low
20ms
No limit
2 buffers
IBM
High
After decode
Enable
3 (nonzero for 4 minutes)
Disable
Enable
Low
20ms
No limit
1 buffer
OEM USB
High
After decode
Enable
3 (nonzero for 4 minutes)
Disable
Enable
Low
20ms
No limit
1 buffer
Disable
Enable as prefix
00 ("")
0D00
(<CR>)
No conversion
No conversion
Full Host
Interface
Support
No conversion
Full Host
Interface
Support
F-2
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232
Wincor-
Nixdorf
RS-232
Single
Cable
9600
8 data bits
1 stop bit
None
Disable
None
9600
8 data bits
1 stop bit
Odd
Enable
CTS flow
None
Disable
Disable
10ms
Do not ignore
Normal
RS-232
No invert
Disable
Disable
10ms
Do not ignore
Normal
RS-232
No invert
9600
7 data bits
1 stop bit
Odd
Disable
Do not ignore
Keybd.
Wedge
Do not ignore
IBM
6
6E
Disable
6
6E
Disable
Slice when nec.
Slice when nec.
64 64
Table top scanner
Do not ignore
OEM USB
Do not ignore
Product Reference Guide
F-3
RS-232
RS-232 ICL DC1 Character Delay Enable
Single Cable Manufacturer Extensions
Disable
Disable
200ms
3 resets
Ignore errors
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
ACK
NAK
Enable
F-4
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
ACK
NAK
Enable
200ms
3 resets
Ignore errors
RS-232
Single
Cable
Disable
Enable
Scannerscale
330 msec
Transmit as 4 digits
Disable
Disable
Option 5
Keybd.
Wedge
IBM OEM USB
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout
Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Simulation
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
A
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
A
Wincor-
Nixdorf
S
Enable
CR
US
RS-232
Single
Cable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Keybd.
Wedge
100 ms
Caps lock
OFF
Disable
Disable
10 msec
Disable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
A
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
A
IBM
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
OEM USB
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Product Reference Guide
F-5
RS-232
UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
A
A
A
1
Enable
Enable
E
E
2
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
F
Disable
Disable
Disable
E
E
Wincor-
Nixdorf
A
A
A
1
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
C
C
C
C
2
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
A
RS-232
Single
Cable
A
A
A
1
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
E
E
E
E
2
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
F
Keybd.
Wedge
A
A
A
1
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
E
E
E
E
2
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
F
IBM
1
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
2
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
OEM USB
1
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
2
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
F-6
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232
Wincor-
Nixdorf
EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID
EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Substitution
EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
F
F
1
F
I
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
FF
FF
FF
A
A
1
A
A
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
B
B
B
FF B
1 (Very
Conservative)
1 (Very
Conservative)
RS-232
Single
Cable
F
F
1
F
I
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
FF
FF
FF
FF
1 (Very
Conservative)
Keybd.
Wedge
F
F
1
F
I
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
FF
FF
FF
IBM
1
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
OEM USB
1
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
FF
1 (Very
Conservative)
1 (Very
Conservative)
1 (Very
Conservative)
Product Reference Guide
F-7
RS-232
Code 128 Add-ons Minimum Reads
UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length
Disable
Disable
1
70mS
Disable
2
1
1
5
Disable
G
2
8
Disable
2
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
1
1
5
Disable
G
RS-232
Single
Cable
2
8
Disable
2
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
1
70mS
Disable
2
1
1
5
Disable
G
Wincor-
Nixdorf
1
8
Disable
2
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
1
70mS
Disable
2
1
1
5
Disable
G
Keybd.
Wedge
2
8
Disable
2
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
1
70mS
Disable
2
Disable
Disable
1
70mS
Disable
2
1
1
5
Disable
IBM
2
8
Disable
2
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
OEM USB
2
8
Disable
2
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
1
1
5
Disable
Disable
1
70mS
Disable
2
F-8
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232
GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID
DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads
Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission
G2
G5
G8
Disable
Disable
R4
1
Disable
Disable
RX
Variable
1
74
1
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
R4
1
Disable
Disable
RS-232
Single
Cable
G2
G5
G8
RX
Variable
1
74
1
Enable
Disable
Disable
E
Variable
1
74
1
Disable
Disable
Disable
Wincor-
Nixdorf
G2
G5
G8
Disable
Disable
E
1
Disable
Disable
RX
Variable
1
74
1
Enable
Disable
Disable
Keybd.
Wedge
G2
G5
G8
Disable
Disable
R4
1
Disable
Disable
IBM
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
Disable
OEM USB
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
Disable
Variable
1
74
1
Enable
Disable
Disable
Variable
1
74
1
Enable
Disable
Disable
Product Reference Guide
F-9
RS-232
Code 128 Transmit Function Characters
Enable
A
Enable
Disable
Disable
#
Variable
1
80
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable
*
Disable
Variable
2
50
Disable
Enable
1
Disable
Disable
F-10
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Enable
Disable
M
Disable
Variable
2
50
Disable
Enable
1
Disable
Disable
Enable
A
Enable
Disable
Disable
K
Variable
1
80
Disable
Disable
Enable
A
Enable
Disable
Disable
B3
Variable
1
80
Disable
Disable
RS-232
Single
Cable
Enable
Disable
B1
Disable
Variable
2
50
Disable
Enable
1
Disable
Disable
Keybd.
Wedge
Enable
Disable
*
Disable
Variable
2
50
Disable
Enable
1
Disable
Disable
Enable
A
Enable
Disable
Disable
#
Variable
1
80
Disable
Disable
IBM
Enable
Disable
Disable
Variable
2
50
Disable
Enable
1
Disable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
OEM USB
Enable
Disable
Disable
Variable
2
50
Disable
Enable
1
Disable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Variable
1
80
Disable
Disable
Variable
1
80
Disable
Disable
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
RS-232
1
Disable
None
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
S
Variable
8
50
Disable
Disable
Enable i
Variable
6
50
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
Disable
Enable
S
Variable
8
50
Disable
Disable
Enable i
Variable
6
50
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
Keybd.
Wedge
1
Disable
None
Disable
Disable
Wincor-
Nixdorf
1
Disable
P
Disable
Disable
RS-232
Single
Cable
1
Disable
None
Disable
Disable
Enable
B2
Variable
6
50
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
Disable
Enable
S
Variable
8
50
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
H
Variable
8
50
Disable
Disable
Enable
I
Variable
6
50
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
IBM
1
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
OEM USB
1
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Variable
6
50
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
Disable
Enable
Variable
6
50
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
Disable
Enable
Variable
8
50
Disable
Disable
Variable
8
50
Disable
Disable
Product Reference Guide
F-11
RS-232
Wincor-
Nixdorf
Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission
Codabar Start Stop Character Set
Codabar Start Stop Character Match
1
Disable
Disable abcd/abcd abcd/abcd
Disable
Disable
Enable
%
Enable
Variable
3
50
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
&
Variable
1
50
Disable
Enable
1
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
N
Enable
Variable
3
50
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
L
Variable
1
50
Disable
Enable
RS-232
Single
Cable
1
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
%
Enable
Variable
3
50
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
&
Variable
1
50
Disable
Enable
Keybd.
Wedge
1
Disable
Disable
Enable
%
Enable
Variable
3
50
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
&
Variable
1
50
Disable
Enable
IBM
1
Disable
Disable
OEM USB
1
Disable
Disable abcd/abcd abcd/abcd abcd/abcd abcd/abcd
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Variable
3
50
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
Variable
1
50
Disable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Variable
3
50
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
Variable
1
50
Disable
Enable
F-12
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation
MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission
RS-232
1
Disable
Enable
1 check char
Enable
@
Variable
4
16
Disable
Disable
1
Wincor-
Nixdorf
1
Disable
Enable
1 check char
Enable
O
Variable
4
16
Disable
Disable
1
RS-232
Single
Cable
1
Disable
Enable
1 check char
Enable
@
Variable
4
16
Disable
Disable
1
Keybd.
Wedge
1
Disable
Enable
1 check char
Enable
@
Variable
4
16
Disable
Disable
1
IBM
1
OEM USB
1
Product Reference Guide
F-13
NOTES
F-14
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Appendix G
Handheld Data Format Requirements
This appendix provides application notes to describe the general format of data that can be accepted by the scanner through the auxilliary port as transmitted from a handheld scanner.
Handheld Data Format Requirements General
• 9600 bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity.
• RTS is used to "bracket" the data received from the handheld: RTS must be asserted high during data transmission, and de-asserted after label transmission is complete. No other flow control mechanisms are required or supported. The de-assertion of the RTS signal must occur no later than 50 milliseconds from the complete transmission of the last character of the transmitted data.
• The time between character transmission can be no longer than 50 milliseconds.
• Symbologies requiring fixed lengths (UPC/EAN) will enforce length requirements for validation of the label.
• Handheld scanner will be required to transmit start and stop characters for Codabar and Code 39 labels.
• Appropriate industrial length requirements will be enforced (if configured) for validation of the label.
• Maximum label lengths will be enforced for label validation (i.e. labels longer than the maximum label size will not be validated).
• Standard Datalogic formats generally use a single prefix character.
The specific formats are provided below.
Datalogic Handheld Data Format Requirements
The following sections describe label transmission formats that are typically observed in factory configurations of Datalogic handheld scanners.
Product Reference Guide
G-1
G-2
DataBar Omnidirectional
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘R4’
• Check character must be included in label
• Application identifier “01” must follow the prefix and preceed the base label
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be 16 characters.
• Example: ‘R40101044123456789’
DataBar Expanded
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘R4’
• Check character must be included in label
UPC-A
• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including prefix must be 13.
• Example: 'A060992011187'.
UPC-A with 2-Digit Supplemental
• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including prefix must be 15.
• Example: 'A06099201118712'.
UPC-A with 5-Digit Supplemental
• System number must be included in label data
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including prefix must be 18
• Example: 'A06099201118712345'
UPC-A with Code 128 Supplemental
• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including prefix must be greater or equal to 19 Code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
• Example: 'A0609920111878100000951'.
UPC-E
• System number must be included in label data
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including prefix must be 9
• Example: 'E09988750'
Product Reference Guide
G-3
G-4
UPC-E with 2-Digit Supplemental
• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including prefix must be 11.
• Example: 'E0998875012'.
UPC-E with 5-Digit Supplemental
• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including prefix must be 14.
• Example: 'E0998875012345'.
UPC-E with Code 128 Supplemental
• System number must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including prefix must be greater or equal to 15 (code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
• Example: 'E099887508101000951'.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
EAN-8
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including prefix must be 10
• Example: 'FF00210126'
EAN-8 with 2-Digit Supplemental
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including prefix must be 12.
• Example: 'FF0021012612'.
EAN-8 with 5-Digit Supplemental
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including prefix must be 15.
• Example: 'FF0021012612345'.
EAN-8 with Code 128 Supplemental
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including prefix must be greater than 16 (code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
• Example: 'FF002101268102000951'.
Product Reference Guide
G-5
G-6
EAN-13
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including prefix must be 14
• Example: 'F1101234567891'
EAN-13 with 2-Digit Supplemental
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
• Supplemental data is appended to base label
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including prefix must be 16
• Example: 'F110123456789112'
EAN-13 with 5-Digit Supplemental
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including prefix must be 19.
• Example: 'F110123456789112345'.
EAN-13 with Code 128 Supplemental
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct
• Supplemental data is appended to base label
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including prefix must be greater or equal to 20 (code 128 Supplemental codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters)
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'
• Example: 'F11012345678918100000951'
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 39
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including start, stop and check characters and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '*'.
• Example : '**Code 39.TEST*'.
Code 39-Pharmacode
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including start, stop and check characters and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'p'.
• Example: 'p*123456789*'.
I 2 of 5
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'i'.
• Example: 'i0123456789'.
Product Reference Guide
G-7
G-8
Standard 2 of 5
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 's'.
• Example: 's0123456789'.
Codabar
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '%'.
• Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set forth by the scanner configuration item
Codabar Start Stop Character Match
• Start stop character sets must be of the form ABCD/ABCD and must be included in the label.
• Example: '%s$99.95s' (the lower case ‘s’ at each end of the example is a placeholder for the start stop character set).
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 128
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '#'.
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Function characters may be transmitted as a hexadecimal value 8x.
Where x correlates to function characters 1 thru 4 as follows:
• x80 = function code 1
• x81 = function code 2
• x82 = function code 3
• x83 = function code 4
• For Code 128 programming labels the format is of the general form
'#/82nnnnn/r ' - /82 is hexadecimal 82 and /r is carriage return.
• Example: '#Code_128.Test'.
MSI/Plessey
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '@'.
• Example: '@144769254'.
Code 93
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '&'.
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Example: '&Code93-test'.
Product Reference Guide
G-9
AIM Formats
G-10
AIM specifies a 3-character string that is attached as a prefix to the label data for transmission. Because AIM specifies one identifier for UPC-A,
UPC-E and EAN-13 labels, UPC-A, UPC-E and EAN-13 will be received from the handheld and transmitted to the POS by the scanner as EAN-13.
Using this form of identification, the ']' character must be the first character in the label received from the handheld. Further identification of the label is specified in the section below. The AIM identifiers on the received label may or may not be transmitted to the POS and are controlled according to the data formatting settings of the scanner.
The following sections describe the prefix strings and identify what specific label characteristics can be supported.
If a label does not have one of the AIM identifiers specified below and the first three characters of the label data fit the following qualifications:
• the first character is a ']'
• the second character is a capital letter or a small letter
• the third character is a digit
...then the label is transmitted to the host with the AIM identifier still appended to the beginning of the label data.
UPC-A
• AIM does not specify UPC-A as a separate symbology using this transmission format - labels will be transmitted as EAN-13.
• Example: ']E00060992011187'.
UPC-E
• AIM does not specify UPC-E as a separate symbology using this transmission format - labels will be transmitted as EAN-13.
• Example: ']E00000000998875'.
EAN-13
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E0'- total length including prefix must be 16.
• Example: ']E01101234567891'.
EAN-8
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be correct.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E4' - total length including prefix must be 11.
• Example: ']E400210126'.
2-Digit Supplemental
• Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E1'.
• length of Supplemental data including prefix must be 5. Total required length is 21 for EAN-13 and 16 for EAN-8.
• Prefix for the main body portion of the label for UPCA/UPCE/
EAN13 can be ]E0 or ]E3.
• If the main body prefix for UPCA/UPCE/EAN13 is ]E0, then the
2-digit addon portion of the label must have a prefix of ]E1.
Examples: addon portion is highlighted data is underlined.
UPC-A 2-Digit addon
UPC-E 2-Digit addon
EAN-8 2-Digit addon
']E00060992011187
]E1
12'
']E00000000998875
]E1
12'
']E400210126
]E1
12'
EAN-13 2-Digit addon ']E01101234567891
]E1
12'
UPC-A
UPC-E
]E3006099201118712
]E3000000099887512
EAN-13 ]E3110123456789112
Product Reference Guide
G-11
G-12
5-Digit Supplemental
• Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E2'.
• Length of supplemental data including prefix must be 8. Total required length is 24 for EAN-13 and 19 for EAN-8.
• Prefix for the main body portion of the label for UPCA/UPCE/
EAN13 can be ]E0 or ]E3.
• If the main body prefix for UPCA/UPCE/EAN13 is ]E0, then the
5-digit addon portion of the label must have a prefix of ]E2.
Examples: addon portion is highlighted data is underlined.
UPC-A 5-Digit addon
UPC-E 5-Digit addon
']E00060992011187
]E2
12345'
']E00000000998875
]E2
12345'
EAN-8 5-Digit addon ']E400210126
]E2
12345'
EAN-13 5-Digit addon ']E01101234567891
]E2
12345'
UPC-A
UPC-E
EAN-13
]E3006099201118712345
]E3000000099887512345
]E3110123456789112345
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Code 39
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including start, stop and check characters and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']A0' or ']A1'.
• Example: '*]A0Code 39.TEST*'.
Codabar
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']F0'.
• Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set forth by the scanner configuration item
Codabar Start Stop Character Match
• Start stop character sets s must be of the form ABCD/ABCD and must be included in the label.
• Example: ']F0s$99.95s' (the lower case ‘s’ at each end of the example is a placeholder for the start stop character set).
MSI/Plessey
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']M0'.
• Example: ']M0144769254'.
Product Reference Guide
G-13
G-14
Code 93
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']G0'.
• Label length excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Example : ']G0Code93-test'.
DataBar Omnidirectional
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']e0'.
• Check character must be included in label.
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be 14 characters.
• Example: ']e001044123456789'.
DataBar Expanded
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']e0'.
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be at least 1 character.
Maximum length is the maximum label size supported by the scanner.
• Example: ']e001900123456789083103001750'.
I 2 of 5
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']I0', ']I1' or ']I2' (other prefixes specify different check character properties which are not supported).
• Example: ']I10123456789'.
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
Standard 2 of 5
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ']S0' (other prefixes specify different check character properties which are not supported).
• Example: ']S00123456789'.
Code 128 / EAN128
• Prefix must be either ASCII characters ']C0', ']C1' or ']C2'.
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• If EAN-128 Symbology is Enabled and prefix is ']C1', label will be identified as an EAN128 otherwise it is identified as a Code 128.
• A prefix of ']C0' designates that no function code is present in the
1st or 2nd character position.
• A prefix of ']C2' designates that a function code 1 is present in the
2nd character.
• Example : ']C0Code_128.Test'.
Product Reference Guide
G-15
NOTES
G-16
Magellan
TM
8300/8400
ASCII Character Set
The table on this page shows a set of ASCII characters and their corresponding Hex Values.
The Hex Values in this table are needed for setting symbology specific label identifiers, as well as enabling custom prefix and suffix characters.
ASCII/Hex Conversion Table
ASCII
Char.
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
FF
CR
SO
SI
BS
HT
LF
VT
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
Hex
No.
3C
3D
3E
3F
38
39
3A
3B
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
2C
2D
2E
2F
28
29
2A
2B
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
ASCII
Char.
>
?
<
=
;
:
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
/
.
-
,
*
+
(
)
$
%
&
’
SP
!
“
#
Hex
No.
1C
1D
1E
1F
18
19
1A
1B
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
0C
0D
0E
0F
08
09
0A
0B
04
05
06
07
00
01
02
03
Hex
No.
5C
5D
5E
5F
58
59
5A
5B
54
55
56
57
50
51
52
53
4C
4D
4E
4F
48
49
4A
4B
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
ASCII
Char.
^
_
]
\
Z
[
X
Y
T
U
V
W
P
Q
R
S
L
M
N
O
H
I
J
K
D
E
F
G
@
A
B
C
Hex
No.
7C
7D
7E
7F
78
79
7A
7B
74
75
76
77
70
71
72
73
6C
6D
6E
6F
68
69
6A
6B
64
65
66
67
60
61
62
63
ASCII
Char.
|
}
~
DEL z
{ x y v w t u r s p q n o l m j k h i f g d e b c
‘ a
www.datalogic.com
© 2012-2013 Datalogic ADC, Inc. • All rights reserved. •
Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of
Datalogic S.p.A. in many countries, including the U.S.A. and the E.U.
Datalogic ADC, Inc.
959 Terry Street
|
Eugene
|
OR 97402
|
USA
Telephone: (1) 541-683-5700
|
Fax: (1) 541-345-7140
820032914 (Rev. W) November 2013
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 1 MagellanTM 8300/8400
- 3 Table of Contents
- 15 Introduction
- 15 Manual Overview
- 16 How to Use This Manual
- 17 Manual Conventions
- 18 Technical Support
- 18 Datalogic Website Support
- 18 Reseller Technical Support
- 18 Telephone Technical Support
- 19 Scanner and Scanner/Scale Nomenclature
- 20 Connections
- 21 Physical Parameters
- 21 Scanning
- 21 Deactivating EAS Labels
- 22 Weighing
- 22 Rated Weight Capacity
- 22 Minimum Increment
- 22 Maximum Static Weight (Overload)
- 22 Automatic Zero Maintenance
- 23 Warm-Up Time
- 23 Thermal Equilibrium
- 23 Power-up
- 23 User Configurable Warm-up
- 24 Electrical Specifications
- 25 Power Supply
- 25 Power Off the Terminal (P.O.T)
- 25 AC Adapter
- 26 Laser and Product Safety
- 27 Canadian Notice
- 28 Labeling
- 29 Agency Compliances
- 31 Bar Codes Supported
- 31 Retail Codes
- 31 Industrial Codes
- 32 Dual Bar Codes for Japan (2 label read)
- 33 Site Preparation and Installation
- 34 Models
- 35 Pre-Installation Considerations
- 36 Checkstand Design
- 36 1. Select a design which allows load-sharing by several muscle groups (for example designs which allow the cashier to use both hands for scanning and bagging).
- 36 2. Select checkstands which deliver products to the cashier on an input belt and do not require the unloading of items from a cart. These designs put less stress on the cashiers’ shoulders and back.
- 36 3. Minimize the distance between the input and take-away conveyors (i.e., the distance the cashier has to reach to move the products).
- 36 4. Minimize the width of the input conveyor to reduce the cashier’s reach to items on the far side of the belt; use a diverter to direct products closer to the cashier.
- 36 5. Select a design which encourages the cashier to slide products across the scanner rather than gripping and lifting. Make sure the horizontal surface of the scanner is flush with all surrounding surfaces.
- 36 6. Choose a design which integrates the scanner and scale to eliminate extended reaches and lifts during weighing tasks.
- 36 7. Provide an easily accessible bag stand at a height 13 - 17 inches (33 - 43.2 cm) lower than the top surface of the checkstand to reduce stresses to the shoulders, elbows, and risks associated with lifting products into bags.
- 36 8. Do not position the bag stand between the cashier and the scanner, due to the increased reach involved.
- 36 9. Position the scanner’s horizontal scanning surface 34 - 36 inches (86.4 - 91.4 cm) above the floor. Maintain a minimum of five inches (12.7 cm) clearance between elbows and work surfaces.
- 36 10. Provide adjustable keyboard mounting (height, tilt, and horizontal reach).
- 36 11. Position the printer, cash drawer, and other checkstand devices the cashier uses within easy reach (less than 18 inches/45.7 cm).
- 36 12. Provide adequate toe space, foot rests or rails, antifatigue mats, and where feasible, an adjustable seat or stand against which the cashiers can lean.
- 37 Scanner Installation
- 37 1. Mount the horizontal surface of the scanner flush with the countertop to encourage slide scanning rather than lifting.
- 37 2. Position the centerline of the scanner read area 8 - 10 inches (20.3 - 25.4 cm) from the edge of the checkstand (cashier side).
- 37 Scanner Maintenance
- 37 1. Keep scanner windows clean. This will improve productivity and reduce rescans.
- 37 2. Replace scanner glass when excessive scratches are evident.
- 37 References
- 37 Scanner Usage
- 37 1. Minimize handling of heavy/bulky products. Leave these items in the cart and use an alternative entry method such as key entry of short PLUs, or handheld scanning.
- 37 2. Regularly train cashiers in proper scanning methods and ergonomics principles, such as:
- 38 Site Preparation Overview
- 38 Ventilation Requirements
- 38 Service Access Requirements
- 39 Recommended Power Installation
- 39 Counter Preparation
- 39 Liquid Drainage
- 39 Leveling
- 39 Cable Routing
- 39 Remote Scale Display Placement
- 39 Vertical Clearance
- 40 Ventilation and Spacing
- 42 Service Access
- 42 Power Installation
- 42 Grounding
- 43 Checkstand Preparation
- 44 Liquid Spills and Moisture
- 44 Counter Cutout
- 44 1. Select a position for the scanner that offers a smooth product flow which best accommodates the reaching distance of the average operator.
- 44 2. Cut the opening in the countertop. Reference Table 2-1 to find the cut-out dimensions for your model. Flange and shelf mount dimensions are provided for your convenience.
- 45 3. Install the AC/DC Power Supply, the Remote Scale Display cable (if Remote Display is used) and the interface cable(s) observing the following:
- 45 4. Connect and verify all system operations.
- 45 Table 2-1 . Cut-Out Dimension References
- 52 Checkstand Mounting
- 52 Checkstand Vibration
- 52 Installation Overview
- 52 1. Unpacking the unit.
- 52 2. Verifying operation before connecting to a POS system.
- 52 3. Routing and connecting cables.
- 52 4. Validating that your scanner communication parameters match the POS terminal’s system requirements.
- 52 5. Confirming connection to the (optional) EAS system.
- 53 6. Functional testing to verify operation when connected to the POS system.
- 53 Unpacking
- 54 Operational Verification
- 54 1. EAS units ONLY: It could be necessary that EAS connections be made previous to power-up. Reference the EAS system manufacturer’s instructions for more details.
- 54 2. Scanner/Scale units ONLY: If the unit is a scanner/scale, connect the Remote Scale Display to the proper connector on the unit’s connector panel (refer to Figure 2-22). Note that if the Remote Scale Display is not connected, a scanner power-up S...
- 54 3. Connect the power cable at the scanner, then at the AC outlet.
- 55 4. The unit should be permitted to reach thermal equilibrium before proceeding to the next steps. (Reference the topic Warm-Up Time in Chapter 1, Introduction.) When the unit is moved from a cooler temperature (such as a storage area) to a warmer env...
- 55 5. Verify that the scanner or scanner/scale passes an operational test by observing the following:
- 56 Scanner
- 56 EAS System
- 56 Scale
- 56 Remote Scale Display
- 56 6. Unplug the AC power cord from the outlet and disconnect the power cord and Remote Scale Display cable from the scanner’s connector panel.
- 57 Diagnostic Modes
- 57 Scanner Diagnostic Mode
- 58 Scale Diagnostic Mode
- 58 Cables & Connections
- 60 Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation
- 60 Lighting Considerations
- 61 Viewing Angle
- 62 Remote Display Cabling
- 62 Placing and Installing the Remote Scale Display
- 62 1. Determine where you want to install the Remote Scale Display based on your counter design, the viewing angle, lighting considerations and cable routing discussed previously. Reference Figure 2- 21 for the display’s physical dimensions. Optimally...
- 62 2. Use the template provided in Figure 2-24 to mark locations of the mounting screw and cable routing holes. The mounting screw holes are on 3-1/2” (85.1 mm) centers. The cable can either be routed through a 3/4” (19 mm) diameter hole directly un...
- 62 3. Drill the mounting screw holes using a drill bit of the appropriate diameter for your mounting screws or bolts.
- 62 4. Drill the cable routing hole using a 3/4” (19 mm) drill bit (optional).
- 63 5. Feed the entire length of the Remote Scale Display interface cable through the cable routing hole so that the assembled Remote Scale Display can be positioned over the mounting screw holes.
- 63 6. If present, remove the rubber band from the connector end.
- 63 7. Install mounting screws or bolts to complete the installation of the Remote Scale Display. Take care not to pinch or pierce the interface cable while securing the Remote Scale Display to the checkstand.
- 65 Changing Weighing Modes
- 65 Set-Up & Installation
- 65 Set-up
- 65 1. Place the scanner on the checkstand next to the counter cutout.
- 65 2. Make all connections to peripheral devices, such as the Remote Scale Display (see Figure 2-23) and, if your installation includes an EAS system, refer to that manufacturer’s instructions for connection and start-up procedures.
- 65 3. Route the cables up through the cutout and connect the scanner and scale interface cable(s), EAS cable and Remote Scale Display cable (optional) to the scanner. Some POS terminals require two interface cables; one for the scanner interface and one...
- 66 4. Connect the power cord to the scanner and route the other end down through the checkstand to the AC power outlet. DO NOT plug the power cord in at this time.
- 67 Installation
- 67 1. Make sure that all cables are firmly attached (except that the AC/ DC power supply should not be connected to the AC outlet yet). Reference Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-25.
- 67 2. Remove the platter to gain access to the interior lift handle. Grasp the platter in the positions shown in Figure 2-26 and gently lift it from the scanner. If the top edge of the platter is blocked, you may find it easier to grasp the platter vert...
- 68 3. Rotate the Interior Lift Handle up as shown in Figure 2-29 and hook the fingers of both hands in the lift handles indicated. DO NOT attempt to lift the unit using the plastic edges, scale frame, or any features other than the lift handles.
- 68 4. Lower the unit into the counter opening, ensuring that none of the cables are pinched, pierced or crimped.
- 68 5. View the bubble level (if present) located on the scanner's spider assembly to ensure the scanner is level. As shown in Figure 2-28, the air bubble should appear fully within the circle indicated. The air bubble can touch the circle, but must not ...
- 69 6. Re-install the Platter and verify that it is flush or just below flush with the countertop. This is necessary to provide smooth scanning from either direction. Make adjustments as needed to align the platter with the counter by moving support rail...
- 69 7. Once installation is complete, proceed with the Operational Verification procedures that follow.
- 71 System Power-Up Recap
- 71 1. Power-down the POS terminal.
- 71 2. Ensure that power is disconnected from the scanner.
- 71 3. Connect the scanner and scale interface cables to your POS terminal. This connection may use one or two cables depending upon your POS terminal interface.
- 71 4. [EAS units ONLY] Connect the EAS interface cable.
- 71 5. Connect the Remote Display cable if your model is a scanner/scale and make any connections to optional equipment, such as a handheld scanner.
- 72 6. Power-up the scanner or scanner/scale by connecting the power cord to an AC power outlet. Wait for the unit to complete the Self test routine (10 seconds maximum). Successful scanner power-up is signified by any or all of the following:
- 72 7. Power-up the POS terminal. Verify that scanning, deactivation and weighing functions are operational and that data is properly communicated between the scanner and your POS system. (Scan, deactivate and weigh a few items.) If problems are encounte...
- 72 8. You have now completed installation and system integration of the scanner or scanner/scale. At this point, the scale must be calibrated and certified in accordance with the requirements of your state and/ or local requirements. Refer to Chapter 5,...
- 73 Operation and Maintenance
- 73 Scanning Items
- 74 Proper Scanning Technique
- 75 Deactivating Security Labels
- 76 Proper Weighing Technique
- 76 1. The L-shaped All-Weighs™ platter allows you to place items anywhere on its surface, including leaning against its vertical section, to be weighed accurately. The “Produce Rail” or (when raised) the “Produce Bar” also provide a convenient...
- 76 2. Once weighed items are in place, enter PLU (price Look-Up) data as described in your POS system instructions. Item weight is displayed on the Remote Display and/or the host display.
- 76 3. Remove the item from the weigh platter.
- 77 Operational Controls
- 77 Operational Modes
- 77 Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation
- 77 Power-Up/Selftest
- 78 Error Reporting
- 78 Operational Configuration
- 79 Operating Mode
- 79 Normal Operation
- 80 Sleep Mode
- 80 Additional Functions
- 80 Programming
- 80 Diagnostic Mode
- 81 Scanner and Scale Reset
- 81 Scale Adjustments
- 81 Zeroing the Scale
- 82 1. Remove everything from the weighing surface of the scanner/scale.
- 82 2. Press the Scale Zero Push Button. (See Figure 1-1).
- 82 3. The Zero light will turn on and the display will show 0.00 lb (0.000 kg). If it does not, see Chapter 4, Problem Isolation.
- 82 4. You have completed the scale zeroing function.
- 82 Calibrating the Scale
- 83 Operational Maintenance
- 84 Vertical Scan Window Replacement
- 84 Standard Vertical Scan Window Removal
- 84 1. Lift up on the vertical bezel as shown in Figure 3-3a and tilt its top up and away from the scanner as shown in Figure 3-3b.
- 84 2. Press from the opposite side to release the edge of the Vertical Scan Window from the two retention tabs shown in Figure 3-3c.
- 84 3. Slide the window from the bezel as shown in Figure 3-3d. Carefully dispose of any damaged glass.
- 85 4. Fully seat the new Vertical Scan Window into the window channel, engaging it within the retention tabs. Reference Figure 3-3d and Figure 3-3c.
- 85 5. Clean both sides of the new Vertical Scan Window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water- based glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.
- 85 6. Tilt in the bezel to seat the two ears at the bottom corners of the bezel into their holes in the scanner and push in on the top of the bezel to securely snap it in place (see Figure 3-3b). Vertical Scan Window replacement is now complete.
- 85 L-Platter Vertical Scan Window Removal
- 85 1. Grasp the platter as shown in Figure 3-4 and gently lift it from the scanner.
- 86 2. If the top edge of the platter is blocked, you may find it easier to use a coin to lift up an edge of the platter as shown in Figure 3-4b, then grasp the platter vertical bezel or other exposed edge.
- 86 3. The Vertical Scan Window is held in place by two tabs each on its top and bottom edges. To remove it, carefully push out on the top as shown in Figure 3-5 and lift it out. Carefully dispose of any damaged glass.
- 86 4. Fully seat the new Vertical Scan Window into the window channel within its bottom retention tabs. Tilt the window in to engage the two tabs at the top of the retainer and carefully snap the window to secure it in place.
- 86 5. Clean both sides of the new Vertical Scan Window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water- based glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.
- 87 6. Re-install the platter. Vertical Scan Window replacement is now complete.
- 87 Horizontal Scan Window Replacement (WRG)
- 87 1. Remove the Platter from the scanner as shown in Figure 3-4.
- 87 2. Turn the platter upside down on a clean, dry surface and remove the two screws shown in Figure 3-6a. Retain the screws for later re- installation.
- 87 3. Tilt the Window Retainer up and away from the platter as shown.
- 87 4. Lift out the Window Gasket and WRG Window from the Platter as shown in Figure 3-6b and carefully dispose of any damaged glass.
- 87 5. Position the new WRG Window and its gasket as shown in Figure 3-6b.
- 87 6. Guide the Window Retainer to seat its edge under the tabs and match the screw holes as shown in Figure 3-6a.
- 87 7. Secure the retainer in position using the original two screws.
- 87 8. Clean both sides of the new WRG window using a paper towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water-based glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.
- 87 9. Re-install the platter. WRG Window replacement is now complete.
- 89 Problem Isolation
- 89 Power-Up Selftest
- 90 Operational Tests
- 90 Diagnostic Tests
- 90 Diagnostic Procedures
- 91 Error Codes
- 92 Table 4-1 . Error Codes
- 94 Scale Error Reporting
- 95 Flowcharts
- 103 Calibration
- 104 Description of Calibration Sequence
- 105 Motion Test
- 105 1. Verify that the Yellow LED is on and the Remote Display reads 0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilograms.
- 105 2. Press lightly on the weigh platter of the scanner/scale with one hand and at the same time press and release the Zero Push Button on the operator’s panel. The Yellow LED should turn Off and the Remote Display should not display 0.00 pounds or 0....
- 105 3. Remove your hand from the weighing platform and verify that the Yellow LED is On and the Remote Display reads 0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilograms.
- 105 Automatic Zero Tracking Test
- 105 1. Place 0.006 pounds (3 grams for metric) on the center of the weighing platform. The entire weight must be placed on the weighing platform at once for this test to be valid. The Yellow LED should go Off and the Remote Display should read 0.01 pound...
- 106 Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration
- 106 1. Assure that the scanner/scale is stable, secure and properly installed. (Refer to Chapter 2, Site Preparation and Installation, for instructions on the proper installation of the scanner/scale).
- 106 2. Power-up the scanner/scale.
- 106 3. Allow the unit to reach temperature equilibrium for at least one hour. If the scanner/scale is already at room temperature, allow at least 15 minutes for acclimatization.
- 106 4. Remove all weight from the weighing surface and ensure that there are no obstructions in the debris chutes of the scanner/scale. See Figure 2-5.
- 106 Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms)
- 106 1. Before proceeding, ensure that the scanner/scale has been prepared for this process by performing the preceding steps titled, Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration.
- 106 2. Remove the weigh platter and make sure that there are no obstructions in the debris chutes.
- 106 3. Cut and remove the seal that secures the calibration switch access cover as shown in Figure 5-1. The seal may not be present if this is the initial installation of the scanner/scale.
- 107 4. Press and release the Calibration Switch to place the scanner/scale in Calibration Mode. (The scanner/scale will sound a a series of rapid beeps indicating it is in Calibration Mode.) If the motor was spinning when you initiated Calibration Mode, ...
- 107 5. Reinstall the weigh platter.
- 107 6. Press the Zero Push Button. The Yellow LED will go out for approximately 10 seconds (or less). If one is present, the Remote Display will alternately display and until the scale is ready to proceed.
- 107 7. When the scale is ready, the Yellow LED will begin blinking again. The Remote Display (if one is present) will show the message “Ad20 (add twenty pounds)” or “Ad10 (add ten kilograms).” (The scanner/ scale will also sound one tone if the s...
- 108 8. The Yellow LED will extinguish for approximately 10 seconds and, if one is present, the Remote Display will alternately display and until the scale is ready to proceed.
- 108 9. If the calibration was successful, (the speaker sounds a single tone), the Scale Status LED begins blinking again, and “End-” appears in the Remote Display (if one is present).
- 108 10. If the calibration was not successful, the speaker will sound five tones indicating a scale failure, and the Scale Status LED will blink twice, strobe (fast blinks) and then continually repeat this sequence until reset. Remove all weight from the...
- 108 11. Press the Zero Push Button again to permanently store the calibration data and exit Calibration Mode. You have completed the calibration of the scanner/scale. The unit’s calibration must now be verified as required by state and/or local weights...
- 109 Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds)
- 109 Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1)
- 109 1. Check that the display reads 0.00 lb. when at rest with nothing on the weighing surface. (The Yellow LED is steadily lit).
- 109 2. Place a five-pound weight on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 5.00 lb.
- 109 3. Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 9.99 and 10.01 lb.
- 109 4. Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 14.99 and 15.01. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.00.
- 109 5. You have completed the Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1).
- 110 Shift Test
- 110 1. Place and remove in succession, a ten-pound load on the center of each of the four quadrants (1, 2, 3, and 4 in Figure 5-2) of the scanner/scale’s weigh platter. Verify that a reading of between 9.99 and 10.01 lb registers under load and that th...
- 110 2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant of the weighing surface, remove all weight from the scale. You have completed the Shift Test.
- 111 Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2)
- 111 1. With the scale starting at zero, place 20.0 pounds in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 19.99 and 20.01 lb.
- 111 2. Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing surface, increasing the load to 25.0 pounds and check that the display reads between 24.99 and 25.01 lb.
- 111 3. Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing surface increasing the load to 30.0 pounds and check that the display reads between 29.99 and 30.01 lb.
- 111 4. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.00.
- 111 Blanking Test
- 111 1. Place weights that total the upper weight limit plus 0.051 pounds on the scale. For example: If the upper limit is set at 30 pounds, place weights equaling 30.051 pounds.
- 111 2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens (_ - - -). This is the overweight indication.
- 112 Decreasing-Load Test
- 112 1. Place a 30.0-pound load on the scale and verify that the display shows between 29.99 and 30.01 pounds.
- 112 2. Remove weights to leave 20 pounds on the scale. Check that the display shows between 19.99 and 20.01.
- 112 3. Remove another 15.0 pounds from the scale and check that the scale reads 5.00 lb.
- 112 4. You have completed the Decreasing Load Test.
- 112 Return to Zero Test
- 112 1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and install a seal (if required).
- 112 2. Reinstall the weigh platter.
- 113 Calibration Verification (Kilograms)
- 113 Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1)
- 113 1. Check that the display reads 0.000 kg when at rest with nothing on the weighing surface. (The Yellow LED is steadily lit).
- 113 2. Place a 100 gram weight on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.100 kg.
- 113 3. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.300 kg.
- 113 4. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.500 kg.
- 113 5. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.600 kg.
- 113 6. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.700 kg.
- 113 7. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 0.800 kg.
- 114 8. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads 1.000 kg.
- 114 9. Increase the weight on the scale to 7.50 kg on the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 7.495 and 7.505 kg.
- 114 10. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.000 kg. You have completed the Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1).
- 114 Shift Test (Metric)
- 114 1. Place and remove in succession, a 5.0 kilogram load on the center of each of the four quadrants (2, 3, 4, and 5 in Figure 5-3) and in the center (1) of the scanner/scale’s weighing platform. Verify that the display shows a reading of between 4.9...
- 114 2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant and the center of the weighing surface, remove all weight from the scale. You have completed the Shift Test.
- 115 Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2)
- 115 1. Place 10.00 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 9.990 kg and 10.010 kg.
- 115 2. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 12.490 kg and 12.510 kg.
- 115 3. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and check that the display reads between 14.990 kg and 15.010 kg.
- 115 4. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.000 kg.
- 115 5. You have completed phase two of the increasing load test.
- 115 Blanking Test
- 115 1. Place weights that total the upper limit plus 0.82 kilograms on the weigh platter. For example: If the upper limit is set at 15 kilograms, place weights equaling 15.82 kilograms.
- 115 2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens ( _ - - -). This is the overweight indication.
- 116 Decreasing-Load Test
- 116 1. Place weights that total 15.8 kilograms.
- 116 2. Remove weights to leave 10 kilograms on the scale and verify that the display shows between 9.990 and 10.010 kilograms.
- 116 3. Remove an additional 9.00 kilograms from the scale and check that the scale reads 1.000 kg.
- 116 4. You have completed the Decreasing Load Test.
- 116 Return to Zero Test
- 116 1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and install a seal (if required).
- 116 2. Reinstall the weigh platter.
- 117 Programming
- 117 Introduction to Label Programming
- 117 Understanding the Basics
- 118 Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System
- 118 Customizing Your Scanner’s Operation
- 120 Programming Overview
- 120 1. Commands can be sent directly from the host. A limited set of host commands are available. Refer to Appendix D for more details or contact Tech Support.
- 120 2. Programming bar code labels can also be used to modify the scanner’s programmable settings. This manual provides the bar code labels and instructions necessary to configure the scanner’s features and options.
- 120 Programming via Handheld Device
- 121 What Is Programming Mode?
- 121 Entering and Exiting Programming Mode.
- 122 Programming Session
- 122 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code to place the scanner in Programming Mode. Depending upon its current programming, the scanner may emit a beep or beeps, indicating it has read the bar code and the scanner (top) green LED will flash on and off slowly while...
- 122 2. Scan the programming bar code(s) that is (are) specially encoded to make the desired changes. With few exceptions, the scanner will emit a triple beep each time you scan a valid programming bar code.
- 123 3. Scan the SWITCH bar code to save any new settings and exit Programming Mode. The scanner will sound a beep and reset upon exiting Programming Mode, and the green LED will return to its usual state (on steady or off). The scanner will exit Programm...
- 123 4. Maintain a good record of all changes made to ensure that you know if the original factory settings have been changed.
- 124 Programming Sequence
- 125 Table 6-1 . Programming Sequence
- 126 LED and Beeper Indicators
- 126 If You Make a Mistake...
- 126 Return to Factory Settings
- 127 Test Mode
- 128 General Scanner Features
- 128 Scanner Button Options
- 128 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 128 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 128 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 130 Double Read Timeout
- 130 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 130 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 130 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 132 Laser Timeout
- 132 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 132 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 132 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 134 Motor Timeout
- 134 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 134 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 134 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 137 Label Gone Timeout
- 137 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 137 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 137 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 140 Auxiliary Port Mode
- 140 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 140 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 140 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 142 Auxiliary Port Baud Rate
- 142 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 142 2. Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the immediately following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 142 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 146 Laser Failure Mode
- 146 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 146 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 146 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 147 Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)/Cashier Training (CT)
- 147 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 147 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 147 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 148 Indication Features
- 148 Green LED Idle State
- 148 1. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 148 2. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 149 Power-up Beep Control
- 149 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 149 2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 149 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 150 Good Read Beep Control
- 150 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 150 2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 150 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 151 Good Read Beep Frequency
- 151 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 151 2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 151 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 153 Good Read Beep Length
- 153 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 153 2. Scan the bar code, SET GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 153 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired good read beep length setting. The selectable range is 1-255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with lead...
- 153 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned
- 154 Good Read Beep Volume
- 154 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 154 2. Scan your selected volume bar code from this or the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 154 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 157 Good Read When to Indicate
- 157 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 157 2. Scan the desired mode bar code from this page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 157 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 159 Scale Features
- 159 Scale Enable
- 159 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 159 2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 159 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 160 Scale Enforced Zero Return
- 160 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 160 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. The strategy is to select the lowest possible filter level...
- 160 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 163 Scale Interface Type
- 163 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 163 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 163 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 165 Scale Calibration Notification
- 165 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 165 2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 165 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 166 Scale Intercharacter Delay
- 166 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 166 2. Scan the bar code below, SET KEYBOARD WEDGE INTERCHARACTER DELAY. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 166 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the delay in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a thre...
- 166 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
- 167 Remote Display — Enable/Disable
- 168 EAS Features
- 168 EAS Active State
- 168 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 168 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 168 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 169 EAS Timeout
- 169 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAS TIMEOUT below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 169 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired EAS Timeout duration. The selectable range is 0-255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroe...
- 169 4. Scan the SWITCH bar code to exit Programming Mode.
- 170 Interface Related Features
- 170 Interface Type
- 171 1. Disconnect current interface cable(s) if currently connected.
- 171 2. Scan the SWITCH bar code
- 171 3. Scan the bar code representing the appropriate interface located on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes adjacent to and on any facing pages to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 172 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 172 5. Connect new interface cable(s).
- 173 RS-232 Interface Selection
- 174 RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf Interface Selection
- 175 RS-232 Single Cable Interface Selection
- 176 OEM USB Interface Selection
- 177 IBM Port 17 Interface Selection
- 178 IBM Port 5B Interface Selection
- 179 IBM Port 9B Interface Selection
- 180 USB Keyboard Interface Selection
- 181 Keyboard Wedge A Interface Selection
- 182 Keyboard Wedge B Interface Selection
- 183 Keyboard Wedge C Interface Selection
- 184 Keyboard Wedge D Interface Selection
- 185 Keyboard Wedge E Interface Selection
- 186 Keyboard Wedge F Interface Selection
- 187 Keyboard Wedge G Interface Selection
- 188 Keyboard Wedge H Interface Selection
- 189 Keyboard Wedge I Interface Selection
- 190 Keyboard Wedge J Interface Selection
- 191 Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length
- 191 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 191 2. Scan the bar code, SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED MESSAGE LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 191 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired maximum host-transmitted message length. The selectable range is 0-249 data characters. (Labels that are longer than this length are not read.) Pad all single and...
- 191 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned
- 192 Number of Host Transmission Buffers
- 192 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 192 2. Scan bar code below representing the desired setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 192 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 193 AIM ID
- 195 Label ID Control
- 195 1. Scan the START barcode.
- 195 2. Select Label ID position as either BEFORE or AFTER by scanning the appropriate barcode.
- 195 3. Determine the desired character(s) (you may choose up to three) which will represent the Label ID for the selected symbology. Next, turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent hex digits associated with ...
- 198 Global Prefix
- 198 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 198 2. Scan the bar code, SET GLOBAL PREFIX below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 198 3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the hex designation for the desired character(s). A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cov...
- 198 4. If designating the full 20 hex pairs, the scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned. If designating less than 20 hex pairs, you can end the programming sequence early by scanning the T...
- 198 5. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 200 Global Suffix
- 200 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 200 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below.
- 200 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 202 Case Conversion
- 202 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 202 2. Scan your selection from the case conversion bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 202 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 204 IBM Features
- 204 IBM Interface Options
- 204 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 204 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 204 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 205 IBM Number of Host Resets
- 205 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 205 2. Scan the bar code, SET IBM NUMBER OF HOST RESETS. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 205 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired number of host resets. The selectable range is 1-15 resets. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-015). Ex...
- 205 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned
- 206 IBM Scale Address
- 206 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 206 2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page that represents the desired scale address designation.
- 206 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 208 IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format
- 208 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 208 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 208 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 209 IBM Label Slicing Control
- 209 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 209 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 209 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 210 IBM Maximum Label Slice Length
- 210 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 210 2. Scan the bar code below, SET IBM MAXIMUM LABEL SLICE LENGTH. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 210 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired slice length. The selectable range is a length from 14 to 246. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (014-100).
- 210 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
- 211 OEM USB Scanner Device Type
- 211 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 211 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 211 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 212 RS-232 Features
- 212 RS-232 Baud Rate
- 212 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 212 2. Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the immediately following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 212 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 216 RS-232 Number of Data Bits
- 216 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 216 2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Data Bit setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 216 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 217 RS-232 Number of Stop Bits
- 217 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 217 2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Stop Bit setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 217 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 218 RS-232 Parity
- 218 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 218 2. Scan the bar code below or on the following pages representing the desired Parity setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 218 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 220 RS-232 Hardware Control
- 220 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 220 2. Scan bar code below or from the following page for the desired setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 220 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 223 RS-232 Intercharacter Delay
- 223 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 223 2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 INTERCHARACTER DELAY. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 223 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the delay in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a thre...
- 223 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
- 224 RS-232 Software Flow Control
- 224 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 224 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 224 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 225 RS-232 Host Echo
- 225 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 225 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 225 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 226 RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval
- 226 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 226 2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 HOST ECHO QUIET INTERVAL. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 226 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired timeout. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a ...
- 226 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
- 227 RS-232 Ignore Host Commands
- 227 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 227 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 227 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 228 RS-232 TTL
- 228 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 228 2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 228 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 229 RS-232 TTL Invert
- 229 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 229 2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 229 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 230 RS-232 ICL DC1 Character Delay Enable
- 230 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 230 2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 230 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 231 RS-232 Team POS ICL Scale
- 231 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 231 2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 231 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 232 RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL
- 232 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 232 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 232 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 233 RS-232 Beep After Weigh
- 233 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 233 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 233 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 234 RS-232 Beep on Not on File
- 235 RS-232 ACK NAK Enable
- 235 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 235 2. Scan the desired option from bar codes below and on the following page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 235 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 237 RS-232 ACK Character
- 237 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 237 2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK CHARACTER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 237 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the hex designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this man...
- 237 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned.
- 238 RS-232 NAK Character
- 238 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 238 2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 NAK CHARACTER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 238 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the hex designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this man...
- 238 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned.
- 239 RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout
- 239 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 239 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 239 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 240 RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value
- 240 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 240 2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 240 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired timeout. A setting of 0 specifies an infinite timeout. The remaining selectable range is 1-75, which is the timeout in 200-millisecond increments. Pad all single ...
- 240 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
- 241 RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count
- 241 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 241 2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 241 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired number. The selectable range is 0-255 resets. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (000-255).
- 241 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
- 242 RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling
- 242 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 242 2. Scan the desired option from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 242 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 244 RS-232 Indicate Transmission Failure
- 245 Single Cable RS-232 Options
- 246 Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol
- 246 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 246 2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 246 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 247 Single Cable RS-232 Stale Weight Timeout
- 247 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 247 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 247 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 249 Single Cable RS-232 Scale — Transmit Weight Digits
- 249 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 249 2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 249 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 250 Single Cable Manufacturer Extensions
- 250 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 250 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 250 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 251 Single Cable Pacesetter Plus Enable
- 251 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 251 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 251 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 252 Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection
- 252 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 252 2. Scan a bar code below or on the following pages representing the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 252 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 255 Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC
- 255 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 255 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 255 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 256 Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK
- 256 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 256 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 256 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 257 Single Cable RS-232 Use STX
- 257 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 257 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 257 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 258 Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character
- 258 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 258 2. Scan the bar code, SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 STX CHARACTER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 258 3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the decimal designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding decimal values is available in the inside bac...
- 258 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
- 259 Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character
- 259 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 259 2. Scan the bar code, SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 ETX CHARACTER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 259 3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the decimal designation for the desired character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding decimal values is available in the inside bac...
- 259 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
- 260 Keyboard Wedge/USB Keyboard Features
- 260 Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Layout
- 260 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 260 2. Scan the appropriate country bar code from the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on that and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 260 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 269 Keyboard Interface Quiet Interval
- 269 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 269 2. Scan the bar code below, SET KEYBOARD INTERFACE QUIET INTERVAL. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 269 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired delay. The selectable range is 1-100, which is the interval duration in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to ...
- 269 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
- 270 Keyboard Interface Caps Lock State
- 270 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 270 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 270 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 272 Keyboard Interface — Keyboard Simulation
- 272 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 272 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 272 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 273 Keyboard Interface — Control Characters
- 273 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 273 2. Scan your choice from the Control Characters feature bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 273 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 275 Keyboard Interface — Intercharacter Delay
- 275 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 275 2. Scan the bar code below, SET KEYBOARD WEDGE INTERCHARACTER DELAY. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 275 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0-100, which is the delay in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a thre...
- 275 4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.
- 276 Symbology Programming
- 276 Coupon Control
- 276 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 276 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 276 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 278 UPC-A Enable
- 278 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 278 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 278 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 279 UPC-A Number System Character Transmission
- 279 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 279 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 279 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 280 UPC-A Check Character Transmission
- 280 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 280 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 280 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 281 Expand UPC-A to EAN-13
- 281 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 281 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 281 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 282 UPC-A Label ID
- 282 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 282 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 282 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 282 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 283 UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
- 283 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 283 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 283 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 283 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 284 UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
- 284 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 284 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 284 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 284 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 285 UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID
- 285 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 285 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 285 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 285 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 286 UPC-A Minimum Reads
- 286 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 286 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 288 UPC-E Enable
- 288 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 288 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 288 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 289 UPC-E Number System Character Transmission
- 289 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 289 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 289 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 290 UPC-E Check Character Transmission
- 290 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 290 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 290 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 291 Expand UPC-E to UPC-A
- 291 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 291 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 291 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 292 Expand UPC-E to EAN-13
- 292 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 292 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 292 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 293 UPC-E Label ID
- 293 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 293 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 293 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 293 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 294 UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
- 294 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 294 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 294 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 294 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 295 UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
- 295 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 295 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 295 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 295 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 296 UPC-E 128 Supplemental Label ID
- 296 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 296 2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 296 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 296 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 297 UPC-E Minimum Reads
- 297 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 297 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 299 EAN-13 Enable
- 299 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 299 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 299 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 300 EAN-13 First Character Transmission
- 300 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 300 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 300 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 301 EAN-13 Check Character Transmission
- 301 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 301 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 301 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 302 EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable
- 302 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 302 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 302 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 303 EAN 13 Label ID
- 303 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 303 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 13 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 303 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 303 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 304 EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
- 304 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 304 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 304 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 304 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 305 EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
- 305 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 305 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 305 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 305 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 306 EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID
- 306 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 306 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID = DISABLE below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 306 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 306 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 307 EAN-13 Minimum Reads
- 307 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 307 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 309 Bookland Label ID
- 309 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 309 2. Scan the bar code, SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 309 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 309 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 310 EAN-8 Enable
- 310 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 310 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 310 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 311 EAN-8 Check Character Transmission
- 311 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 311 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 311 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 312 Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13
- 312 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 312 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 312 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 313 EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Insertion
- 313 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 313 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 313 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 314 EAN-8/JAN-8 Guard Substitution
- 314 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 314 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 314 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 315 EAN-8/JAN-8 Both Guards Substitution
- 315 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 315 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 315 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 316 EAN-8 Stitch Exact Label Halves
- 316 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 316 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 316 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 317 EAN-8 Stitch Unlike Label Halves
- 317 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 317 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 317 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 318 EAN 8 Label ID
- 318 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 318 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 8 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 318 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 318 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 319 EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
- 319 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 319 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 319 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 319 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 320 EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
- 320 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 320 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 320 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 320 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 321 EAN-8 128 Supplemental Label ID
- 321 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 321 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 321 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 321 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 322 EAN-8 Decoding Levels
- 322 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 322 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 322 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 325 EAN-8 Minimum Reads
- 325 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 325 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 327 EAN-8 Minimum Segment Length
- 327 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 327 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 333 Other UPC/EAN Options
- 334 Price Weight Check
- 334 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 334 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 334 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 337 In-Store Label Minimum Reads
- 337 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 337 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 339 Enable EAN Two Label
- 339 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 339 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 339 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 340 EAN Two Label Combined Transmission
- 340 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 340 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 340 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 341 UPC/EAN Guard Insertion
- 341 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 341 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 341 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 342 UPC/EAN Stitch Exact Label Halves
- 342 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 342 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 342 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 343 UPC/EAN Stitch Unlike Label Halves
- 343 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 343 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 343 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 344 UPC/EAN Character Reconstruction
- 344 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 344 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 344 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 345 EAN Two Label Minimum Reads
- 345 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 345 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 347 UPC/EAN Correlation
- 347 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 347 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 348 UPC/EAN Minimum Segment Length
- 348 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 348 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 354 Addons
- 354 None
- 354 2 Digits
- 354 5 Digits
- 354 Code 128 Add-on
- 354 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 354 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on this and the following page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 354 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 358 Addon Timer
- 358 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 358 2. Scan the bar code, SET ADDON TIMER DURATION below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 358 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Addon Timer Duration. The selectable range is 1- 10, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroe...
- 359 2-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads
- 359 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 359 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 361 5-Digit Add-ons Minimum Reads
- 361 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 361 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 363 Code 128 Add-ons Minimum Reads
- 363 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 363 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 365 GTIN Enable
- 365 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 365 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 365 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 366 GTIN Label ID
- 366 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 366 2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 366 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 366 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 367 GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
- 367 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 367 2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 367 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 367 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 368 GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
- 368 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 368 2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 368 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 368 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 369 GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID
- 369 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 369 2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 369 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 369 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 370 DataBar Omnidirectional Enable
- 370 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 370 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 370 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 371 DataBar Omnidirectional/EAN-128 Emulation
- 371 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 371 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 371 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 372 DataBar Omnidirectional Label ID
- 372 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 372 2. Scan the bar code, SET DataBar Omnidirectional LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 372 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 372 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 373 DataBar Omnidirectional Minimum Reads
- 373 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 373 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 375 DataBar Expanded Enable
- 375 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 375 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 375 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 376 DataBar Expanded EAN-128 Emulation
- 376 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 376 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 376 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 377 DataBar Expanded Label ID
- 377 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 377 2. Scan the bar code, SET DataBar Expanded LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 377 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 377 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 378 DataBar Expanded Length Control
- 378 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 378 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 378 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 379 DataBar Expanded Length 1
- 379 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 379 2. Scan the bar code, SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 379 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 01 to 74. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-074).
- 379 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 380 DataBar Expanded Length 2
- 380 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 380 2. Scan the bar code, SET DataBar Expanded LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 380 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 074. Pad all single and ...
- 380 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 381 DataBar Expanded Minimum Reads
- 381 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 381 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 383 Code 39 Enable
- 383 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 383 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 383 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 384 Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission
- 384 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 384 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 384 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 385 Code 39 Check Character Calculation
- 385 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 385 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 385 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 386 Code 39 Check Character Transmission
- 386 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 386 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 386 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 387 Code 39 Full ASCII
- 387 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 387 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 387 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 388 Code 39 Label ID
- 388 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 388 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 388 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 388 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 389 Code 39 Require Quiet Zones
- 389 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 389 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 389 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 390 Code 39 Length Control
- 390 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 390 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 390 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 391 Code 39 Length 1
- 391 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 391 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 391 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-050).
- 391 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 392 Code 39 Length 2
- 392 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 392 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 392 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired fixed label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all singl...
- 392 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 393 Code 39 Correlation
- 393 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 393 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 394 Code 39 Stitching
- 394 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 394 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 395 Code 39 Minimum Reads
- 395 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 395 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 397 Pharmacode 39 Enable
- 397 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 397 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 397 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 398 Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission
- 398 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 398 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 398 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 399 Pharmacode 39 Check Character Transmission
- 399 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 399 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 399 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 400 Pharmacode 39 Label ID
- 400 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 400 2. Scan the bar code, SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 400 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 400 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 401 Code 128 Enable
- 401 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 401 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 401 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 402 Code 128 Transmit Function Characters
- 402 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 402 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 402 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 403 Convert Code 128 to Code 39
- 403 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 403 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 403 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 404 Code 128 Label ID
- 404 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 404 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 404 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 404 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 405 Code 128 Length Control
- 405 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 405 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 405 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 406 Code 128 Length 1
- 406 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 406 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 406 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 001 to 080. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-080).
- 406 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 407 Code 128 Length 2
- 407 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 407 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 407 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 080. Pad all single and ...
- 407 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 408 Code 128 Correlation
- 408 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 408 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 409 Code 128 Stitching
- 409 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 409 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 410 Code 128 Minimum Reads
- 410 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 410 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 412 EAN-128 Enable
- 412 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 412 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 412 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 413 EAN-128 Label ID
- 413 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 413 2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-128 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 413 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 413 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 414 Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Enable
- 414 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 414 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 414 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 415 I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
- 415 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 415 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 415 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 416 I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
- 416 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 416 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 416 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 417 I 2 of 5 Label ID
- 417 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 417 2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 of 5 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 417 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 417 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 418 I 2 of 5 Length Control
- 418 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 418 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 418 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 419 I 2 of 5 Length 1
- 419 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 419 2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 419 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 002 to 050, even numbers only. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-...
- 419 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 420 I 2 of 5 Length 2
- 420 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 420 2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 of 5 LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 420 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 002 to 050, even numbers only. ...
- 420 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 421 I 2 of 5 Correlation
- 421 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 421 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 422 I 2 of 5 Stitching
- 422 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 422 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 422 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 423 I 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
- 423 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 423 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 425 Standard 2 of 5 (Std 2 of 5) Enable
- 425 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 425 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 425 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 426 Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
- 426 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 426 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 426 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 427 Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
- 427 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 427 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 427 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 428 Standard 2 of 5 Label ID
- 428 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 428 2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 428 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 428 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 429 Standard 2 of 5 Length Control
- 429 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 429 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 429 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 430 Standard 2 of 5 Length 1
- 430 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 430 2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 430 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-050).
- 430 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 431 Standard 2 of 5 Length 2
- 431 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 431 2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 431 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and ...
- 431 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 432 Standard 2 of 5 Correlation
- 432 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 432 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 433 Standard 2 of 5 Stitching
- 433 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 433 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 433 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 434 Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Reads
- 434 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 434 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 436 Codabar Enable
- 436 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 436 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 436 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 437 Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission
- 437 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 437 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 437 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 438 Codabar Start Stop Character Set
- 438 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 438 2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page representing the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes and facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 438 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 440 Codabar Start Stop Character Match
- 440 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 440 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 440 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 441 Codabar Check Character Calculation
- 441 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 441 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 441 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 442 Codabar Check Character Transmission
- 442 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 442 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 442 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 443 Codabar Label ID
- 443 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 443 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 443 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 443 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 444 Codabar Require Quiet Zones
- 444 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 444 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 444 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 445 Codabar Length Control
- 445 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 445 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 445 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 446 Codabar Length 1
- 446 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 446 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 446 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 003 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (003-050).
- 446 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 447 Codabar Length 2
- 447 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 447 2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 447 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 003 to 050. Pad all single and ...
- 447 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 448 Codabar Correlation
- 448 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 448 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 449 Codabar Stitching
- 449 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 449 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 450 Codabar Minimum Reads
- 450 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 450 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 452 Code 93 Enable
- 452 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 452 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 452 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 453 Code 93 Label ID
- 453 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 453 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 453 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 453 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 454 Code 93 Length Control
- 454 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 454 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 454 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 455 Code 93 Length 1
- 455 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 455 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 455 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-050).
- 455 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 456 Code 93 Length 2
- 456 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 456 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 456 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 001 to 050. Pad all single and ...
- 456 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 457 Code 93 Correlation
- 457 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 457 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 458 Code 93 Stitching
- 458 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 458 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 459 Code 93 Minimum Reads
- 459 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 459 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 461 MSI/Plessey Enable
- 461 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 461 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 461 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 462 MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation
- 462 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 462 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 462 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 463 MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters
- 463 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 463 2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired number of MSI/ Plessey check characters to be calculated and verified. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you ...
- 463 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 464 MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission
- 464 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 464 2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 464 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 465 MSI/Plessey Label ID
- 465 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 465 2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 465 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover...
- 465 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 466 MSI/Plessey Length Control
- 466 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 466 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 466 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 467 MSI/Plessey Length 1
- 467 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 467 2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH 1 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 467 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. The selectable range for this option is 004 to 016. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (004-016).
- 467 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 468 MSI/Plessey Length 2
- 468 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 468 2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LENGTH 2 below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 468 3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that represent the desired label length. A setting of 000 will ignore this length (only one fixed length), otherwise, the selectable range for this option is 004 to 016. Pad all single and ...
- 468 4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 469 MSI/Plessey Correlation
- 469 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 469 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 470 MSI/Plessey Stitching
- 470 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 470 2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 470 3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar code.
- 471 MSI/Plessey Minimum Reads
- 471 1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
- 471 2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
- 473 LED/Beeper Indications & Controls
- 473 Controls and Indicators
- 474 LED and Beeper Indications
- 474 Scanner and Scale LEDs
- 474 Table A-1 . Scanner and Scale LED Indications
- 475 Volume/Tone Push Button
- 475 Table A-2 . Volume/Tone Push Button Functions
- 477 Scale Zero Push Button
- 477 Table A-3 . Scale Zero Push Button Functions
- 478 Calibration Switch
- 478 Calibration Switch Seal
- 478 Calibration Switch
- 479 Cable Information
- 479 Introduction
- 479 General Specifications
- 479 Wire Requirements
- 480 Scanner
- 480 Connector Hardware
- 480 Table B-1 RS-232 Cable Pinouts
- 481 Scale
- 481 Connector Hardware
- 481 Table B-2 RS-232 Scale Cable Pinouts
- 482 IBM Cable Pinout
- 482 Scanner and Scale
- 482 Connector Hardware
- 482 Table B-3 IBM Cable Pinouts
- 483 OEM USB Cable Pinout
- 483 Scanner and Scale
- 483 Connector Hardware
- 483 Table B-4 . OEM USB Cable Pinouts
- 484 Auxilliary Port
- 484 External Handheld Input
- 484 Connector Hardware
- 484 Table B-5 Auxilliary Port Cable Pinouts
- 485 Power Cable
- 485 Connector Hardware
- 485 Table B-6 Power Cable Pinouts
- 486 Remote Display
- 486 Connector Hardware
- 486 Table B-7 Remote Display Cable Pinouts
- 487 EAS Comm Port (Sensormatic® systems ONLY)
- 487 EAS Deactivator Control Box Connection
- 487 Connector Hardware
- 487 Table B-8 . EAS Port Cable Pinouts
- 489 Keypad
- 497 Host Commands
- 497 Accepting Commands from an RS-232 Scanner Host
- 499 Keyboard Function Key Mappings
- 499 Keyboard Model Cross Reference
- 500 Table E-1 . Keyboard Model Cross Reference
- 501 Table E-2 . Scanset 1 Function Key Map
- 502 Table E-3 . Scanset 2 Function Key Map
- 503 Table E-4 . Scanset 3, 102-Key Function Key Map
- 504 Table E-5 . Scanset 3 122-Key Function Key Map
- 505 Table E-6 . Japanese DOS Function Key Map
- 506 Table E-7 . NEC 9801-Key Function Key Map
- 507 Table E-8 . USB Keyboard Function Key Usage Map
- 509 Factory Defaults
- 509 Table F-1 . Factory Default Settings
- 523 Handheld Data Format Requirements
- 523 Handheld Data Format Requirements General
- 523 Datalogic Handheld Data Format Requirements
- 524 DataBar Omnidirectional
- 524 DataBar Expanded
- 524 UPC-A
- 524 UPC-A with 2-Digit Supplemental
- 524 UPC-A with 5-Digit Supplemental
- 525 UPC-A with Code 128 Supplemental
- 525 UPC-E
- 526 UPC-E with 2-Digit Supplemental
- 526 UPC-E with 5-Digit Supplemental
- 526 UPC-E with Code 128 Supplemental
- 527 EAN-8
- 527 EAN-8 with 2-Digit Supplemental
- 527 EAN-8 with 5-Digit Supplemental
- 527 EAN-8 with Code 128 Supplemental
- 528 EAN-13
- 528 EAN-13 with 2-Digit Supplemental
- 528 EAN-13 with 5-Digit Supplemental
- 528 EAN-13 with Code 128 Supplemental
- 529 Code 39
- 529 Code 39-Pharmacode
- 529 I 2 of 5
- 530 Standard 2 of 5
- 530 Codabar
- 531 Code 128
- 531 MSI/Plessey
- 531 Code 93
- 532 AIM Formats
- 532 UPC-A
- 532 UPC-E
- 532 EAN-13
- 533 EAN-8
- 533 2-Digit Supplemental
- 534 5-Digit Supplemental
- 535 Code 39
- 535 Codabar
- 535 MSI/Plessey
- 536 Code 93
- 536 DataBar Omnidirectional
- 536 DataBar Expanded
- 536 I 2 of 5
- 537 Standard 2 of 5
- 537 Code 128 / EAN128
- 539 ASCII Character Set
- 539 ASCII / Hex Conversion Table